VR4 05 GGS-000394-07E OM NoRestriction

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 340

Submission Prohibited

NEC Group Internal Use Only


GGS-000394-07E
January 2017

iPASOLINK VR 4
OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE

NEC Corporation
7-1, Shiba 5-Chome, Minato-Ku, Tokyo 108-8001, Japan
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
GGS-000394-07E

© 2015 – 2017 by NEC Corporation

GGS-000394-07E
Printed in Japan
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
–i–

iPASOLINK VR 4
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

CONTENTS

1. GENERAL 1-1

2. PRECAUTION 2-1

3. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-1

3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2 Current Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2


3.2.1 Metering Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.2 View Current Metering Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.3 Performance Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5


3.3.1 View PM Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.2 MODEM PMON Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.2.1 PM Items for MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3.2.2 Monitoring Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3.3 E1 PMON Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.3.3.1 PM Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.3.3.2 Monitoring Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.3.4 STM-1 PMON Report — MS/RS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3.4.1 PM Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3.4.2 Monitoring Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.3.5 ETH RMON Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.3.5.1 PM Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.3.6 VLAN Counter Report — VLAN Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.3.6.1 PM Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.3.6.2 Monitoring Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.3.7 VLAN Counter Report — Shaper Group Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.3.7.1 PM Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


January 2017
Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
– ii – CONTENTS

3.3.8 LSP Counter Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18


3.3.8.1 PM Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.3.8.2 Monitoring Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.3.9 PM Counter Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.3.9.1 MODEM PM Counter Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.3.9.2 STM-1/E1 PM Counter Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.3.9.3 Ethernet Interface PM Counter Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.3.10 TCA Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.3.10.1 MODEM TCA Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.3.10.2 MODEM RX Level TCA Default Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.3.10.3 MODEM RF BBE TCA Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.3.10.4 STM-1, E1 TCA Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.3.10.5 Ethernet Interface TCA Threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

4. CONTROL ITEMS 4-1

4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1


4.1.1 Maintenance Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2 Before Starting Maintenance Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4


4.2.1 Wrist Strap Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for WebLCT Operation). . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4.3 Loopback Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7


4.3.1 IF Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3.1.1 Loopback Operation on Local Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.3.1.2 Loopback Operation on Remote Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.3.2 TDM Loopback Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.3.2.1 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.3.2.2 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.3.2.3 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.3.2.4 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.3.3 L2 Loopback Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.3.4 Link OAM Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.4 Switching Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35


4.4.1 Manual Switch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.4.2 MODEM TX/RX Switch Control2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4.4.2.1 TX Switch Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4.4.2.2 RX Switch Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTENTS – iii –

4.4.2.3 Lock-In Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42


4.4.3 RSTP/MSTP Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.4.4 ERP Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.4.4.1 Execute ERP Switching Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.4.4.2 Execute Loop Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4.4.5 LAG Revert Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.4.6 SNCP Switch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.4.7 APS Switch Group Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.4.8 Timing Source Switch Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.4.8.1 Unlock the Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.4.8.2 Switch Timing Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4.4.9 MPLS-TP Linear Protection Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.4.9.1 Priority of Each Switching State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.4.9.2 Set Manual Switching Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

4.5 MODEM Maintenance Control (Radio Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70


4.5.1 ATPC Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4.5.2 TX Mute Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.5.2.1 TX Mute Control on Local Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.5.2.2 TX Mute Control Operation on Remote Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4.5.3 CW Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.5.4 TX Modulation Manual Control (for AMR Mode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4.5.5 Reset XPIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

4.6 Laser Shutdown Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89


4.6.1 Laser Shutdown Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
4.6.2 ALS Manual Switch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

4.7 Equipment Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94


4.7.1 Reset H/W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
4.7.2 Reset F/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4.7.2.1 Reset CPU (IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
4.7.2.2 Reset CPU (ODU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

4.8 Offline Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104


4.8.1 DADE Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
4.8.2 RF Sub Band Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
4.8.3 Adjust X-DEM Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
4.8.4 Adjust Delay Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
– iv – CONTENTS

4.9 PTP Domain Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116


4.9.1 Unlock the Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
4.9.2 Switch Domain Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119

4.10Maintenance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121


4.10.1 ETH OAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
4.10.2 MPLS-TP OAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129

4.11Equipment Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137


4.11.1 Backup Database [Export (NE ➞ Storage) Utility] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
4.11.2 Update Database [Update (Storage➞ NE) Utility] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
4.11.2.1 Upload Program File — Main Card (IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
4.11.2.2 Upload Program File — ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
4.11.2.3 Update FPGA Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
4.11.2.4 Update Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
4.11.2.5 Update MODEM Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
4.11.2.6 Update SSL Server Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
4.11.2.7 Update CLI Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
4.11.3 Switch (Swap) Program ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
4.11.3.1 Switch (Swap) Main Card ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
4.11.3.2 Switch ODU Rom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175
4.11.4 Check USB Memory Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-178
4.11.5 Log Clear Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
4.11.6 Restore Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180

4.12Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
4.12.1 Equipment Inventory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
4.12.1.1 IDU Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
4.12.1.2 ODU Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187
4.12.2 Software License Key Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-190
4.12.3 User Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193

5. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-1

5.1 Equipment Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


5.1.1 Reporting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1.2 Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2 View Current Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTENTS –v–

5.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2


5.2.2 Display Current Status Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.2.1 Active Alarm Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2.2 Event Log Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.2.3 MODEM/ODU Tab and List of Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.2.2.4 IDU Tab and List of Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.2.5 E1 Tab and List of Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.2.2.6 STM-1 Tab and List of Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.2.2.7 ETH Tab and List of Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.2.2.8 MSE Tab and List of Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.2.3 Save the Displayed Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

5.3 Alarm Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18


5.3.1 iPASOLINK VR 4 Controls and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.3.2 Fundamental Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.3.2.1 MC-AV Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.3.2.2 FAN-CV Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.3.3 Universal Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.3.3.1 MODEM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.3.3.2 16E1-A Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.3.3.3 STM1-A Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.3.3.4 GbE-A Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

5.4 Trouble Shooting Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21


5.4.1 Troubleshoot ODU TX Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.4.2 Troubleshoot ODU RX Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.4.3 Troubleshoot IDU Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

5.5 Replacing Procedures for Radio Portion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

5.6 Replacing Procedure for IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25


5.6.1 Replace Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.6.2 Replace IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

5.7 Trouble Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28


5.7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.7.2 Making Contact with NEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.7.3 Objects and Their Condition Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.7.4 Clearing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Adaptive CLK Status.................................................................................. 5-35
ALS ............................................................................................................ 5-35

IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
– vi – CONTENTS

APS Lock-in Status .................................................................................... 5-35


APS Online Status ..................................................................................... 5-35
APS Protection Status ............................................................................... 5-35
APS SW ..................................................................................................... 5-35
ATPC Power Mode .................................................................................... 5-36
AU AIS ....................................................................................................... 5-36
AU LOP ...................................................................................................... 5-36
Bus Error .................................................................................................... 5-37
CLK Card Type Mismatch .......................................................................... 5-37
CLK Card Unequipped ............................................................................... 5-37
CLK Drift .................................................................................................... 5-38
CLK FAIL ................................................................................................... 5-39
CLK Status Changed ................................................................................. 5-39
CLK2M Mount Status ................................................................................. 5-39
Cluster Alarm Out ...................................................................................... 5-39
Communication FAIL ................................................................................. 5-40
Compression Setting Mismatch ................................................................. 5-41
Delay Equalizer Setting Mismatch ............................................................. 5-42
E1 AIS........................................................................................................ 5-43
E1 AIS Generated ...................................................................................... 5-43
E1 LOS ...................................................................................................... 5-43
Early Warning ............................................................................................ 5-44
ETH LF....................................................................................................... 5-44
ETH LOS.................................................................................................... 5-45
ETH RF ...................................................................................................... 5-45
ETH TF ...................................................................................................... 5-46
ETH-OAM LOC .......................................................................................... 5-46
ETH-OAM Mismerge.................................................................................. 5-47
ETH-OAM RDI ........................................................................................... 5-48
ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP ..................................................................... 5-48
EXT CLK AIS ............................................................................................. 5-49
EXT CLK LOF ............................................................................................ 5-49
EXT CLK Loop ........................................................................................... 5-49
EXT CLK LOS ............................................................................................ 5-50
EXT CLK Mount Status .............................................................................. 5-50
EXT CLK Output Status ............................................................................. 5-50
EXT CLK Quality Level .............................................................................. 5-50
EXT CLK Type Mismatch........................................................................... 5-51
EXT CLK Unequipped................................................................................ 5-51
FAN Fail ..................................................................................................... 5-52
FDB Full ..................................................................................................... 5-52
Flow Control ............................................................................................... 5-52
Frame ID .................................................................................................... 5-52
High BER ................................................................................................... 5-53
HP PLM...................................................................................................... 5-53
HP RDI ....................................................................................................... 5-53
HP TIM ....................................................................................................... 5-54
HP UNEQ................................................................................................... 5-54
IF Cable Short ............................................................................................ 5-55
Inphase ...................................................................................................... 5-55

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTENTS – vii –

L2SYNC Loss ............................................................................................ 5-56


LACP Status .............................................................................................. 5-56
LAG LINK ................................................................................................... 5-56
LAG LLF Status ......................................................................................... 5-57
LAG Port Loop Detect ................................................................................ 5-57
LAG Port Status ......................................................................................... 5-57
LAN Link .................................................................................................... 5-57
License Mismatch ...................................................................................... 5-58
Link OAM Down ......................................................................................... 5-58
LLF............................................................................................................. 5-59
LLF Message Timeout ............................................................................... 5-59
LO REF ...................................................................................................... 5-59
LOF ............................................................................................................ 5-59
LOM ........................................................................................................... 5-60
Low BER .................................................................................................... 5-60
LP PLM ...................................................................................................... 5-61
LP RDI ....................................................................................................... 5-61
LP UNEQ ................................................................................................... 5-62
LTI.............................................................................................................. 5-62
Main Card CPU Alarm ............................................................................... 5-63
Maintenance .............................................................................................. 5-63
MDI/MDI-X ................................................................................................. 5-63
MOD........................................................................................................... 5-63
MODEM Power Supply .............................................................................. 5-64
MODEM Power Supply Alarm.................................................................... 5-64
Module ....................................................................................................... 5-64
MPLS-TP APS Protocol Error .................................................................... 5-65
MPLS-TP OAM LOC ................................................................................. 5-65
MPLS-TP OAM Mismerge ........................................................................ 5-66
MPLS-TP OAM RDI .................................................................................. 5-67
MPLS-TP OAM Unexpected MEP ............................................................ 5-67
MS AIS ....................................................................................................... 5-68
MS RDI ...................................................................................................... 5-68
Mute Status ................................................................................................ 5-68
ODU Alarm................................................................................................. 5-69
ODU CPU / Cable Open ............................................................................ 5-69
ODU Power Supply .................................................................................... 5-69
ODU Power Supply Set Status .................................................................. 5-69
Online Status ............................................................................................. 5-70
Overheated ................................................................................................ 5-70
PJE ............................................................................................................ 5-70
Power Supply............................................................................................. 5-71
PPS Fail ..................................................................................................... 5-71
Radio Traffic Aggregation Encapsulation Error.......................................... 5-72
Radio Traffic Aggregation Link................................................................... 5-72
Radio Traffic Aggregation Port Status ....................................................... 5-72
Radio Traffic Aggregation Setting Mismatch.............................................. 5-72
Radio Transmission Mode Mismatch ......................................................... 5-73
Radio Transparent Clock Setting Mismatch............................................... 5-74
RDI............................................................................................................. 5-75

IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
– viii – CONTENTS

Remote Critical Event ................................................................................ 5-75


Remote Dying Gasp................................................................................... 5-75
Remote Errored Frame .............................................................................. 5-76
Remote Errored Frame Period................................................................... 5-76
Remote Errored Frame Seconds Summary............................................... 5-76
Remote Errored Frame Symbol Period...................................................... 5-76
Remote Link Fault ...................................................................................... 5-76
RS DEG ..................................................................................................... 5-77
RS EXC...................................................................................................... 5-77
RS LOF ...................................................................................................... 5-78
RS TIM ....................................................................................................... 5-78
RS UAS Status .......................................................................................... 5-79
Running Status .......................................................................................... 5-79
RX Bus Error .............................................................................................. 5-79
RX Level .................................................................................................... 5-80
RX Modulation ........................................................................................... 5-80
RX SW Status ............................................................................................ 5-80
SFP Port Type ........................................................................................... 5-80
SFP Removed............................................................................................ 5-81
SFP Type Mismatch................................................................................... 5-81
SNCP Protection Status............................................................................. 5-82
SNCP SW .................................................................................................. 5-82
Softkey Equip Serial Mismatch .................................................................. 5-82
Speed & Duplex ......................................................................................... 5-83
Squelch ...................................................................................................... 5-83
SSM Fail .................................................................................................... 5-83
STM-1 AIS Generated ............................................................................... 5-83
STM-1 LOS ................................................................................................ 5-83
Switch Complete ........................................................................................ 5-84
Switch Over FAIL ....................................................................................... 5-84
Switched Reason ....................................................................................... 5-84
Switched Time ........................................................................................... 5-84
TDM Buffer Underrun................................................................................. 5-85
TDM/AMR Range Mismatch ...................................................................... 5-85
Temperature .............................................................................................. 5-86
TF............................................................................................................... 5-86
Total FDB Full ............................................................................................ 5-86
TU AIS ....................................................................................................... 5-87
TU LOP ...................................................................................................... 5-87
TX Bus Error .............................................................................................. 5-87
TX Input ..................................................................................................... 5-88
TX Modulation ............................................................................................ 5-88
TX Power ................................................................................................... 5-88
TX SW Lock-in Status ................................................................................ 5-89
TX SW Reverse Request ........................................................................... 5-89
TX SW Status ............................................................................................ 5-89
Type Mismatch........................................................................................... 5-89
UAE............................................................................................................ 5-90
Unequipped................................................................................................ 5-90
Unlocked .................................................................................................... 5-91

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTENTS – ix –

Usage Error................................................................................................ 5-91


XIF ............................................................................................................. 5-92
XPIC Mode Mismatch ................................................................................ 5-92
XPIC Pair Mute Mode Mismatch ................................................................ 5-93

5.8 Alarm Action Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94


5.8.1 STM-1 Interface [Through Mode] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
5.8.2 STM-1 Interface [Channelized Mode] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
5.8.3 E1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96

IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
– x/END – CONTENTS

This page is intentionally left blank.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
GENERAL 1-1

1. GENERAL

This chapter provides information regarding the routine and corrective maintenance
for the iPASOLINK of the 6 to 42 GHz PDH/SDH digital radio system.

The information includes the following with their instructions and procedures:

 Precautions for maintenance

 Materials for maintenance (test sets and accessories)

 Procedures for routine maintenance tasks

 Procedures for switching control operation

 Descriptions and procedures for corrective maintenance tasks

NOTE: CWDMF does not have its registration information, that is, its inventory
information cannot be retrieved. To check the CWDMF type, retrieve the
information of SFP that is on the card associated with the target CWDMF.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
1-2/END GENERAL

This page is intentionally left blank.

GGS-000394-07E iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
PRECAUTION 2-1

2. PRECAUTION

The maintenance personnel should report his/her arrival and departure from a station
to the relevant station. Following precautions must be carefully observed during
maintenance.

 Warning

1. The –48V DC power is superimposed on the center conductor of the coaxial


cable between the IDU and the ODU. Connecting the test equipment directly
to this terminal may damage it and touching the coaxial cable core may cause
electrical shock.

2. Maintenance personnel must take necessary steps to prevent the


Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) that may damage the cards on the IDU or
cause errors. Wear a conductive wrist strap connected to the grounded (G)
jack on the front of the equipment shelf. This will minimize the static build-up
during maintenance.

3. Turn off the ODU PWR switch on the associated MODEM before connecting/
disconnecting the I/F cable to prevent the equipment from being damaged.

4. Once the equipment is powered on, wait at least 5 minutes before turning its
power off. Repeatedly turning the power on and off within a short interval may
cause the equipment damaged.

5. Do not allow an ODU TX Output to be opened or short-circuited while the TX


power is on. Execute the TX Mute Control operation in the Maintenance
Mode, or turn the ODU PWR switch on IDU off before disconnecting a cable
or feeder from the ODU TX Output.

6. Contact NEC before downloading programs onto the WebLCT. Equipment


may not function correctly if the download takes place improperly.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
2-2 PRECAUTION

 Caution

1. In a system using the CWDM, do not stare at the laser beam or look at it
directly with optical instruments, or it may hurt your eyes (Class 1M laser
product).

2. Be aware that the top surface of the IDU above MODEM turns very hot in
operation.

3. Before replacing the IDU, turn off the ODU PWR switch and disconnect all
cables.

4. Before performing the maintenance, the Maintenance Mode of IDU should be


set to on by the LCT.

5. In order to prevent the traffic from causing interruption while in the


maintenance, execute the TX/RX SW Manual Switching in the 1+1 system.

6. Detected and reported alarms will be updated by executing the CPU RESET
that initializes the CPU.

7. Information on the maintenance and the control such as Mute, CW, LB, etc. is
released if the power is turned off.

8. If each setup item of NE SETUP or SYSTEM OPERATION is changed during


operation, traffic will be momentarily interrupted.

9. When the TX SW is activated, momentary traffic interruption may occur.

10. After completing maintenance, restore all connections, manual control


settings to normal and confirm that all alarm LEDs are unlit.

11. After equipment start-up, allow the equipment to warm up at least 30 minutes.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
PRECAUTION 2-3

 Handling of Connectors

 Straight Type
To tighten the TNC-Male Connector of I/F Cable to the IDU, engage the connector
nut only using fingers while holding the cable by the other hand.

Figure 2-1 Straight Type

IDU

I/F CABLE

 L-Shape Type
Tighten the engage connector nut only as well. [Tightening Torque: 0.3 to 0.5 N-m (3
to 5 kg-cm)].

Figure 2-2 L-Shape Type

IDU

I/F CABLE

Rotating this type of connector by holding other parts, as illustrated below, may
damage the connector:

Figure 2-3 Bad Example

IDU

I/F CABLE

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
2-4/END PRECAUTION

This page is intentionally left blank.

GGS-000394-07E iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-1

3. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

3.1 Overview
Following procedures are provided for the routine maintenance and checks, which
ensures the equipment to operate properly, and prevents the equipment and system
from being damaged.

Before starting these checking procedures, carefully observe the precautions


described in the 2. PRECAUTION section.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-2 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

3.2 Current Metering

3.2.1 Metering Items

Following items can be set to measure:


Metering Items

Item Description

MODEM TX Power Indicates the RF power output level at ODU.

RX Level Indicates the RF power input level at ODU.

ODU Power Supply Indicates the voltage level of Power Supply at ODU.

BER Indicates the value of BER measurement.

TX Modulation Indicates the current TX Modulation.

RX Modulation Indicates the current RX Modulation.

SFP SFP TX Power Indicates the optical output power of SFP.

SFP RX Power Indicates the optical input power of SFP.

FAN FAN Speed Indicates the number of fan rotations per minute (rpm).

IDU IDU Temperature Indicates the internal temperature (Celsius scale)

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-3

3.2.2 View Current Metering Setting

Procedure 3-1

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Metering to select Current Metering.

3. The Current Metering window appears. To view or change the metering


setting, click the link of target object.

Figure 3-1 Current Metering Window

The Current Metering option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-4 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

4. Click the Normal Speed / High Speed radio button provided for the Refresh
Cycle option window to specify the period of retrieving data:

Figure 3-2 Current Metering Option Window

Figure 3-3 Current Metering Option Window (SFP)

Table 3-1 Current Metering Parameter

Parameter Value Description

Refresh Cycle Normal Speed (10sec) Refreshes measured value every 10 seconds.

High Speed (3sec) Refreshes measured values every 3 seconds.

NOTES:
1. If a parameter indicates the abnormal value, check the Current Status and the
performance monitor (Current/History PMON/RMON Report), and operate the
loopback test to isolate the alarmed sections from the normal sections.
2. RX LEVEL varies depending on the received RF signal level.
3. ODU Power Supply voltage varies depending on the length of I/F Cable between IDU
and ODU.

5. Click the Cancel button on top of the Current Metering window. This step
ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-5

3.3 Performance Monitoring


The Performance Monitoring (PM) is used to identify and isolate the problem if
occurred at a particular line or path. This function also monitors the quality of lines
and paths. All Performance Monitoring parameters are collected every minute and
accumulated to 15-minute and 24-hour (1 day) statistics.
 Red-colored field indicates the value of TCN report.
 Yellow-colored field indicates that the system is in the Maintenance Mode.
 A value with an asterisk (*) is invalid, which could not appropriately be
obtained due to the failed condition (alarm), etc.

3.3.1 View PM Reports

Procedure 3-1

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand PMON/RMON Report to select the
desired object. Example below selects MODEM PMON Report.

Figure 3-4 PMON/RMON Report — MODEM PMON Report Window

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-6 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

3.3.2 MODEM PMON Report

Figure 3-5 MODEM PM Report


 Clicking the link opens its detailed data.

iPASOLINK supports the following PM parameters:

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-7

3.3.2.1 PM Items for MODEM


Table 3-2 PM Items for MODEM

Monitor Type Description Spec.

RF BBE Background Block Error The sum of the background block error. ITU-T G.826

RF ES Errored Second The cumulative time in which more than one ITU-T G.826
block error per second was detected.

RF SES Severely Errored Second The cumulative time in which the BER of a one ITU-T G.826
second period exceeded a set percentage
(30%).

RF SEP Severely Errored Period The cumulative time in which the BER of a one ITU-T G.826
second period exceeded 10E-3.

RF UAS Unavailable Second The cumulative time in which the unit remained ITU-T G.826
inoperative.

RF OFS Out of Frame Second The total number of seconds of Out of Frame ITU-T G.826
condition, which is generated in 15 minute-
blocks. (OFS is applied to the Total only).

RX Level 1 (MAX) The minimum and maximum reception level. If


two routes exist, monitoring takes place for No.
RX Level 1 (MIN) 1 and 2 respectively).
———
RX Level 2 (MAX)

RX Level 2 (MIN)

TX Power (MAX) The minimum and maximum output power. ———

TX Power (MIN) ———

TX Modulation Modulating level at the outgoing radio signals ———

RX Modulation Modulating level at the incoming radio signals. ———

3.3.2.2 Monitoring Points

Figure 3-6 Monitoring Point for Line Failure

1 2

Facility Monitoring Item Monitoring Point Monitoring Area

Near-End

RF BBE, ES, SES-, UAS, OFS 1 2➜1

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-8 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Figure 3-7 Monitoring Point for ODU Receiving Level

1 2

Facility Monitoring Item Monitoring Point Monitoring Area

Near-End

RF ODU RX Level (MAX)


1 2➜1
ODU RX Level (MIN)

Figure 3-8 Monitoring Point for ODU Transmitting Level

1 2

Facility Monitoring Item Monitoring Point Monitoring Area

Near-End

RF ODU TX Power (MAX)


2 2
ODU TX Power (MIN)

Figure 3-9 Monitoring Point for ODU Modulating Level

1 2

Facility Monitoring Item Monitoring Point Monitoring Area

Near-End

RF TX Modulation 2 2

RX Modulation 1 1

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-9

3.3.3 E1 PMON Report

Figure 3-10 E1 Interface PM Report


 Clicking the link opens its detailed data.

3.3.3.1 PM Items
Table 3-3 PM Items for E1 Interface

Monitor Type Description Spec.

E1 E1 CV Near-end Code Violation ———

3.3.3.2 Monitoring Points

Figure 3-11 Monitoring Point for Line Failure

1
Facility Monitoring Item Monitoring Point Monitoring Area

Near-End

E1 CV 2 1➜2

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-10 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

3.3.4 STM-1 PMON Report — MS/RS

Figure 3-12 STM-1 Interface PM Report


 Clicking the link opens the detailed data.

3.3.4.1 PM Items

Table 3-4 PM Items for STM-1 Interface

Monitor Type Description Spec.

RS BBE Near-end Background Block Error ITU-T G.826 G.784

ES Near-end Errored Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

SES Near-end Severely Errored Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

SEP Near-end Severely Error Period ———

UAS Unavailable Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

OFS Out of Frame Seconds ITU-T G.784

SFP RX Power SFP received power (Min) ———

SFP TX Power SFP transmit power (Min) ———

MS BBE Near-end Background Block Error ITU-T G.826 G.784

ES Near-end Errored Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

SES Near-end Severely Errored Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

SEP Near-end Severely Error Period ———

UAS Unavailable Seconds ITU-T G.826 G.784

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-11

3.3.4.2 Monitoring Points

Figure 3-13 Monitoring Point for STM-1 RS

1 2

4 3

Facility Monitoring Item Monitoring Point Monitoring Area

Near-End

STM-1 RS BBE, ES, SES, UAS, OFS 1 2➜1

SFP TX Power 4 4

SFP RX Power 1 1

Figure 3-14 Monitoring Point for STM-1 MS

4 3

1 2

Facility Monitoring Item Monitoring Point Monitoring Area

Near-End

STM-1 MS BBE, ES, SES, UAS 4 3➜4

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

3.3.5 ETH RMON Report

Figure 3-15 Ethernet Interface PM Report


 Clicking the link opens the detailed data.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-13

3.3.5.1 PM Items
Table 3-5 PM Items for Ethernet Interface (1/2)

Monitor Type Description Spec.

RX Octs The total number of octets received on the interface, including RFC2819
framing characters.

TX Octs The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, RFC2819
including framing characters.

RX Pkts Number of packets received (including bad packets, all RFC2819


Unicast, Broadcast packets, and Multicast packets).

TX Pkts The total number of packets transmitted. RFC2819

RX Drop Events A count of drop packets received. RFC2819

RX Undersize Pkts Number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long RFC2819
and were otherwise well formed

RX Fragments Number of error frames of less than 64 octets in received data RFC2819
length.

RX 64Octs Number of received packets that were 64 octets in length RFC2819


(including error packets).

TX 64Octs Number of transmitted packets that are 64 octets in length RFC2819


(including error packets).

RX 65 to 127Octs Number of received packets that were between 65 and 127 RFC2819
octets in length (including error packets)

TX 65 to 127Octs Number of transmitted and received packets that were RFC2819


between 65 and 127 octets in length (including error packets).

RX128 to 255Octs Number of received packets that were between 128 and 255 RFC2819
octets in length (including error packets).

TX128 to 255Octs Number of transmitted packets that were between 128 and 255 RFC2819
octets in length (including error packets).

RX 256 to 511Octs Number of received packets that were between 256 and 511 RFC2819
octets in length (including error packets).

TX 256 to 511Octs Number of transmitted packets that were between 256 and 511 RFC2819
octets in length (including error packets).

RX 512 to 1023Octs Number of received packets that were between 512 and 1023 RFC2819
octets in length (including error packets).

TX 512 to 1023Octs Number of transmitted packets that were between 512 and RFC2819
1023 octets in length (including error packets).

RX 1024 to 1518Octs Number of received packets that were between 1023 and 1518 RFC2819
octets in length (including error packets).

TX 1024 to 1518Octs Number of transmitted packets that were between 1024 and RFC2819
1518 octets in length (including error packets).

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-14 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Table 3-5 PM Items for Ethernet Interface (2/2)

Monitor Type Description Spec.

RX CRC Alignment Errors Number of reception alignments of FCS error frames. RFC2819

RX Oversize Pkts A count of frames received on a particular interface that RFC2819


exceeds maximum size bytes.

RX Jabbers Number of error frames bigger than 1519 octets in receive data RFC2819
length.

RX Multicast Pkts Number of good multicast packets received (excluding RFC2819


broadcast packets).

TX Multicast Pkts The total number of packets that higher-level protocols RFC2819
requested to be transmitted to a multicast address.

RX Broadcast Pkts Number of good broadcast packets received. RFC2819

TX Broadcast Pkts The total number of packets that are higher-level protocols RFC2819
requested to be transmitted to a broadcast address.

TX Collisions Number of collisions on this Ethernet segment. RFC2819

RX Unknown TPID Number of abandoned frames included in unsetting TPID RFC2819


frames received, or number of frames abandoned by
Broadcast Storm Control function.

RX Unknown VID Number of abandoned frames included in unsetting VID RFC2819


frames received.

RX MAC Limit Number of frames discarded due to exceeding MAC learning RFC2819
Limit.

RX Filter Discard Number of frames abandoned by input filtering function. RFC2819

RX QoS Discard Number of frames abandoned by Policing function of input RFC2819


port.

TX Queue# Discard Number of QoS frames discard by transmission Queue#. RFC2819


[# denotes the queue level 0 to 7.]
NOTE: TX Queue# Discard does not include Ageout Drop.

Per VLAN Rx Frames Number of frames received as particular VLAN RFC2819

Per VLAN Tx Frames Number of frames transmitted as particular VLAN RFC2819

Per VLAN Rx QoS Discard Number of discarded frames per VLAN basis. RFC2819

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-15

3.3.6 VLAN Counter Report — VLAN Counter


Figure 3-16 VLAN Counter PM Report
 Clicking the link opens its detailed data.

(leftmost filed)

(rightmost filed)

3.3.6.1 PM Items
Table 3-6 PM Items for Ethernet Interface

Monitor Type Description Spec.

Octets The total number of octets received on the interface. ——

Frames The total number of frames received on the interface. ——

Discard The total number of discarded frames per VLAN die to the policing function.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-16 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

3.3.6.2 Monitoring Points

Figure 3-17 Monitoring Point for VLAN Counter

SLOT 4 / PORT 2 / VLAN 200


SLOT 3 / PORT 1 / VLAN 200 MONITORING POINT
MONITORING POINT

SLOT 3, PORT 1 SLOT 4, PORT 2

INGRESS EGRESS

VLAN 100 VLAN 200


VLAN 300

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-17

3.3.7 VLAN Counter Report — Shaper Group Counter


NOTE: When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, this function is currently not
available.
Figure 3-18 Shaper Group Counter PM Report
 Clicking the link opens its detailed data.

(scrolled to rightmost field)

3.3.7.1 PM Items
Table 3-7 PM Items for Ethernet Interface

Monitor Type Description Spec.

Octets Number of received. ——


NOTE: The octets are converted to the L1 count, which
is different from the ETH frame size.

Frames Number of frames. ——

Queue # Discard Number of discarded frames leveled to Queue #. ——


[# denotes the queue level 0 to 7]
NOTE: Queue# Discard does not include Ageout Drop.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-18 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

3.3.8 LSP Counter Report


Figure 3-19 LSP Counter PM Report
 Clicking the link opens its detailed data.

3.3.8.1 PM Items
Table 3-8 PM Items for LSP

Monitor Type Description Spec.

Octets The total number of octets received on the LSP. ——

Frames The total number of frames received on the LSP. ——

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-19

3.3.8.2 Monitoring Points

Figure 3-20 LSP Counter’s Monitoring Points for LER/LSR at Proactive CC

MEP MEP
LER NODE LSR NODE LER NODE
CCM

NNI NNI

CCM

LSP COUNTER (LER) LSP COUNTERS (LSR) LSP COUNTER (LER)

The counter at the LSR Node includes MPLS-TP OAM frames (Proactive CC, On-
Demand OAMs, APS) as well, where counters of the LER Nodes do not. Using CCM
frames in the example above, the RX counter value at the LSR node will be greater
than TX counter values at LER nodes on both ends by the number of CCM frames. In
the normal traffic, the counts at both LER Nodes (not counting the MPLS-TP OAM
frames) should be the same.

Figure 3-21 LSP Counter’s Monitoring Points for LER/LSR at On-Demand LB

MIP
MEP

LER NODE LSR NODE LER NODE


LB

LB

LSP COUNTER (LER) LSP COUNTERS (LSR) LSP COUNTER (LER)

The On-Demand LB frames, for example above, are counted at LSR node, but are not
at LER nodes, thus the RX counter value at LSR Node will be greater than TX
counter values at LER Nodes on both ends by the number of LB frames

As for the On-Demand LT, frames are also proceeded in the same manner as
described above.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-20 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

3.3.9 PM Counter Range

3.3.9.1 MODEM PM Counter Range


Table 3-9 MODEM PM Counter Range

Monitor Type 15 Min PM Counter Range 24H PM Counter Range

RF OFS 0 to 900 0 to 86400

RF BBE It depends on radio setting It depends on radio setting


(CS and Modulation). (CS and Modulation).

RF ES 0 to 900 0 to 86400

RF SES 0 to 900 0 to 86400

RF SEP 0 to 900 0 to 86400

RF UAS 0 to 900 0 to 86400

3.3.9.2 STM-1/E1 PM Counter Range


Table 3-10 SDH/PDH PM Counter Range

Monitor Type 15 Min PM Counter Range 24H PM Counter Range

OFS 0 to 900 0 to 86400

BBE 0 to 16777215 0 to 1610612640

ES 0 to 900 0 to 86400

SES 0 to 900 0 to 86400

SEP 0 to 900 0 to 86400

UAS 0 to 900 0 to 86400

E1 CV 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

3.3.9.3 Ethernet Interface PM Counter Range


Table 3-11 LAN PM Counter Range (1/2)

Monitor Type 15 Min PM Counter Range 24H PM Counter Range

RX Octs 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

TX Octs 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

RX Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Drop Events 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Undersize Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Fragments 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-21

Table 3-11 LAN PM Counter Range (2/2)

Monitor Type 15 Min PM Counter Range 24H PM Counter Range

RX 64Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX 64Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX 65 to 127Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX 65 to 127Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX 128 to 255Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX 128 to 255Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX 256 to 511Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX 256 to 511Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX 512 to 1023Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX 512 to 1023Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX 1024 to 1518Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX 1024 to 1518Octs 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX CRC Alignment Errors 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Oversize Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Jabbers 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Multicast Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX Multicast Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Broadcast Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX Broadcast Pkts 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

TX Collisions 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295

RX Unknown TPID 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

RX Unknown VID 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

RX MAC Limit 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

RX Filter Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

RX QoS Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

TX Queue0 Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

TX Queue1 Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

TX Queue2 Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

TX Queue3 Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

Per VLAN Rx Frames 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

Per VLAN Tx Frames 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

Per VLAN Rx QoS Discard 0 to 18446744073709551615 0 to 18446744073709551615

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-22 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

3.3.10 TCA Threshold

3.3.10.1 MODEM TCA Threshold


Table 3-12 MODEM TCA Threshold

Monitor Type 15 Min TCA Threshold 24H TCA Threshold

Range Default Threshold Range Default Threshold

Occur Recovery Occur Recovery

RF OFS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RF BBE These depend on the radio setting (CS and These depend on the radio settings (CS and
Modulation). Modulation).

RF ES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RF SES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RF SEP 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RF UAS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RX LEV –99 to –30 These depend on the radio –99 to –30 These depend on the radio
setting (CS and Modulation). setting (CS and Modulation).

3.3.10.2 MODEM RX Level TCA Default Threshold


Table 3-13 MODEM RX LEV TCA Default Threshold
Channel
Spacing
7 MHz 14 MHz 28 MHz 40MHz 56 MHz 80 MHz 112 MHz
(CS)
Modulation RSL RSL RSL RSL RSL RSL RSL
Type
QPSK –98 dBm –95 dBm –92 dBm –91 dBm –89 dBm –88 dBm –86 dBm

16QAM –92 dBm –89 dBm –86 dBm –85 dBm –83 dBm –82 dBm –80 dBm

32QAM –89 dBm –86 dBm –83 dBm –82 dBm –80 dBm –79 dBm –77 dBm

64QAM –86 dBm –83 dBm –80 dBm –79 dBm –77 dBm –76 dBm –74 dBm

128QAM –83 dBm –80 dBm –77 dBm –76 dBm –74 dBm –73 dBm –71 dBm

256QAM –80 dBm –77 dBm –74 dBm –73 dBm –71 dBm –70 dBm –68 dBm

512QAM –77 dBm –74 dBm –71 dBm –70 dBm –68 dBm –67 dBm –65 dBm

1024QAM –74 dBm –71 dBm –68 dBm –67 dBm –65 dBm –64 dBm –62 dBm

2048QAM —— –68 dBm –65 dBm –64 dBm –62 dBm –61 dBm –59 dBm

4096QAM —— —— –62 dBm –61 dBm –59 dBm —— ——

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-23

3.3.10.3 MODEM RF BBE TCA Threshold


Table 3-14 MODEM RF BBE TCA Threshold [MODEM-A]
Modulation Type 15 Min TCA Threshold 24H TCA Threshold
CS Modulation Range Default Threshold Range Default Threshold
Occur Recovery Occur Recovery
7M QPSK 1 to 805000 8050 805 1 to 77280000 772800 77280
16QAM 1 to 1611000 16110 1611 1 to 154656000 1546560 154656
32QAM 1 to 2014000 20140 2014 1 to 193344000 1933440 193344
64QAM 1 to 2417000 24170 2417 1 to 232032000 2320320 232032
128QAM 1 to 2820000 28200 2820 1 to 270720000 2707200 270720
256QAM 1 to 3223000 32230 3223 1 to 309408000 3094080 309408
14M QPSK 1 to 805000 8050 805 1 to 77280000 772800 77280
16QAM 1 to 1611000 16110 1611 1 to 154656000 1546560 154656
32QAM 1 to 2014000 20140 2014 1 to 193344000 1933440 193344
64QAM 1 to 2417000 24170 2417 1 to 232032000 2320320 232032
128QAM 1 to 2820000 28200 2820 1 to 270720000 2707200 270720
256QAM 1 to 3223000 32230 3223 1 to 309408000 3094080 309408
28M QPSK 1 to 805000 8050 805 1 to 77280000 772800 77280
16QAM 1 to 1611000 16110 1611 1 to 154656000 1546560 154656
32QAM 1 to 2014000 20140 2014 1 to 193344000 1933440 193344
64QAM 1 to 2417000 24170 2417 1 to 232032000 2320320 232032
128QAM 1 to 2820000 28200 2820 1 to 270720000 2707200 270720
256QAM 1 to 3223000 32230 3223 1 to 309408000 3094080 309408
512QAM 1 to 3626000 36260 3626 1 to 348096000 3480960 348096
40M QPSK 1 to 1208000 12080 12080 1 to 115968000 1159680 115968
16QAM 1 to 2215000 22150 2215 1 to 212640000 2126400 212640
32QAM 1 to 2629000 26290 2629 1 to 252384000 2523840 252384
64QAM 1 to 3228000 32280 3228 1 to 309888000 3098880 309888
128QAM 1 to 3829000 38290 3829 1 to 367584000 3675840 367584
256QAM 1 to 4431000 44310 4431 1 to 425376000 4253760 425376
512QAM 1 to 5539000 55390 5539 1 to 531744000 5317440 531744
56M QPSK 1 to 1611000 16110 1611 1 to 154656000 1546560 154656
16QAM 1 to 3223000 32230 3223 1 to 309408000 3094080 309408
32QAM 1 to 4028000 40280 4028 1 to 386688000 3866880 386688
64QAM 1 to 4834000 48340 4834 1 to 464064000 4640640 464064
128QAM 1 to 5640000 56400 5640 1 to 541440000 5414400 541440
256QAM 1 to 6446000 64460 6446 1 to 618816000 6188160 618816
512QAM 1 to 7252000 72520 7252 1 to 696192000 6961920 696192

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-24 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Table 3-15 MODEM RF BBE TCA Threshold [MODEM-EA] (1/2)

Modulation Type 15 Min TCA Threshold 24H TCA Threshold

CS Modulation Range Default Threshold Range Default Threshold

Occur Recovery Occur Recovery

7M QPSK 1 to 385000 3850 385 1 to 36960000 369600 36960

16QAM 1 to 771000 7710 771 1 to 74016000 740160 74016

32QAM 1 to 962000 9620 962 1 to 92352000 923520 92352

64QAM 1 to 1155000 11550 1155 1 to 110880000 1108800 110880

128QAM 1 to 1347000 13470 1347 1 to 129312000 1293120 129312

256QAM 1 to 1733000 17330 1733 1 to 166368000 1663680 166368

512QAM 1 to 1733000 17330 1733 1 to 166368000 1663680 166368

1024QAM 1 to 2288000 22880 2288 1 to 219648000 2196480 219648

14M QPSK 1 to 394000 3940 394 1 to 37824000 378240 37824

16QAM 1 to 789000 7890 789 1 to 75744000 757440 75744

32QAM 1 to 985000 9850 985 1 to 94560000 945600 94560

64QAM 1 to 1183000 11830 1183 1 to 113568000 1135680 113568

128QAM 1 to 1379000 13790 1379 1 to 132384000 1323840 132384

256QAM 1 to 1774000 17740 1774 1 to 170304000 1703040 170304

512QAM 1 to 1774000 17740 1774 1 to 170304000 1703040 170304

1024QAM 1 to 2343000 23430 2343 1 to 224928000 2249280 224928

2048QAM 1 to 2343000 23430 2343 1 to 224928000 2249280 224928

28M QPSK 1 to 644000 6440 644 1 to 61824000 618240 61824

16QAM 1 to 1289000 12890 1289 1 to 123744000 1237440 123744

32QAM 1 to 160900 16090 1609 1 to 154464000 1544640 154464

64QAM 1 to 1933000 19330 1933 1 to 185568000 1855680 185568

128QAM 1 to 2254000 22540 2254 1 to 216384000 2163840 216384

256QAM 1 to 2900000 29000 2900 1 to 278400000 2784000 278400

512QAM 1 to 2900000 29000 2900 1 to 278400000 2784000 278400

1024QAM 1 to 3791000 37910 3791 1 to 363936000 3639360 363936

2048QAM 1 to 3791000 37910 3791 1 to 363936000 3639360 363936

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-25

Table 3-15 MODEM RF BBE TCA Threshold [MODEM-EA] (2/2)

Modulation Type 15 Min TCA Threshold 24H TCA Threshold

CS Modulation Range Default Threshold Range Default Threshold

Occur Recovery Occur Recovery

40M QPSK 1 to 891000 8910 891 1 to 85536000 855360 85536

16QAM 1 to 1782000 17820 1782 1 to 171072000 1710720 171072

32QAM 1 to 2226000 22260 2226 1 to 213696000 2136960 213696

64QAM 1 to 2673000 26730 2673 1 to 256608000 2566080 256608

128QAM 1 to 3117000 31170 3117 1 to 299232000 2992320 299232

256QAM 1 to 4010000 40100 4010 1 to 384960000 3849600 384960

512QAM 1 to 4010000 40100 4010 1 to 384960000 3849600 384960

1024QAM 1 to 5242000 52420 5242 1 to 503232000 5032320 503232

2048QAM 1 to 5242000 52420 5242 1 to 503232000 5032320 503232

56M QPSK 1 to 1291000 12910 1291 1 to 123936000 1239360 123936

16QAM 1 to 2583000 25830 2583 1 to 247968000 2479680 247968

32QAM 1 to 3226000 32260 3226 1 to 309696000 3096960 309696

64QAM 1 to 3875000 38750 3875 1 to 372000000 3720000 372000

128QAM 1 to 4517000 45170 4517 1 to 433632000 4336320 433632

256QAM 1 to 5812000 58120 5812 1 to 557952000 5579520 557952

512QAM 1 to 5812000 58120 5812 1 to 557952000 5579520 557952

1024QAM 1 to 7597000 75970 7597 1 to 729312000 7293120 729312

2048QAM 1 to 7597000 75970 7597 1 to 729312000 7293120 729312

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-26 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Table 3-16 MODEM RF BBE TCA Threshold [MODEM-AV] (1/3)

Modulation Type 15 Min TCA Threshold 24H TCA Threshold

CS Modulation Range Default Threshold Range Default Threshold

Occur Recovery Occur Recovery

7M QPSK 1 to 385000 3850 385 1 to 36960000 369600 36960

16QAM 1 to 771000 7710 771 1 to 74016000 740160 74016

32QAM 1 to 962000 9620 962 1 to 92352000 923520 92352

64QAM 1 to 1155000 11550 1155 1 to 110880000 1108800 110880

128QAM 1 to 1347000 13470 1347 1 to 129312000 1293120 129312

256QAM 1 to 1733000 17330 1733 1 to 166368000 1663680 166368

512QAM 1 to 1733000 17330 1733 1 to 166368000 1663680 166368

1024QAM 1 to 2288000 22880 2288 1 to 219648000 2196480 219648

14M QPSK 1 to 394000 3940 394 1 to 37824000 378240 37824

16QAM 1 to 789000 7890 789 1 to 75744000 757440 75744

32QAM 1 to 985000 9850 985 1 to 94560000 945600 94560

64QAM 1 to 1183000 11830 1183 1 to 113568000 1135680 113568

128QAM 1 to 1379000 13790 1379 1 to 132384000 1323840 132384

256QAM 1 to 1774000 17740 1774 1 to 170304000 1703040 170304

512QAM 1 to 1774000 17740 1774 1 to 170304000 1703040 170304

1024QAM 1 to 2343000 23430 2343 1 to 224928000 2249280 224928

2048QAM 1 to 2343000 23430 2343 1 to 224928000 2249280 224928

28M QPSK 1 to 644000 6440 644 1 to 61824000 618240 61824

16QAM 1 to 1289000 12890 1289 1 to 123744000 1237440 123744

32QAM 1 to 1609000 16090 1609 1 to 154464000 1544640 154464

64QAM 1 to 1933000 19330 1933 1 to 185568000 1855680 185568

128QAM 1 to 2254000 22540 2254 1 to 216384000 2163840 216384

256QAM 1 to 2900000 29000 2900 1 to 278400000 2784000 278400

512QAM 1 to 2900000 29000 2900 1 to 278400000 2784000 278400

1024QAM 1 to 3791000 37910 3791 1 to 363936000 3639360 363936

2048QAM 1 to 3791000 37910 3791 1 to 363936000 3639360 363936

4096QAM 1 to 3723000 37230 37233 1 to 357408000 3574080 357408

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-27

Table 3-16 MODEM RF BBE TCA Threshold [MODEM-AV] (2/3)

Modulation Type 15 Min TCA Threshold 24H TCA Threshold

CS Modulation Range Default Threshold Range Default Threshold

Occur Recovery Occur Recovery

56M QPSK 1 to 1291000 12910 1291 1 to 123936000 1239360 123936

16QAM 1 to 2583000 25830 2583 1 to 247968000 2479680 247968

32QAM 1 to 3226000 32260 3226 1 to 309696000 3096960 309696

64QAM 1 to 3875000 38750 3875 1 to 372000000 3720000 372000

128QAM 1 to 4517000 45170 4517 1 to 433632000 4336320 433632

256QAM 1 to 5812000 58120 5812 1 to 557952000 5579520 557952

512QAM 1 to 5812000 58120 5812 1 to 557952000 5579520 557952

1024QAM 1 to 7597000 75970 7597 1 to 729312000 7293120 729312

2048QAM 1 to 7597000 75970 7597 1 to 729312000 7293120 729312

4096QAM 1 to 7597000 75970 7597 1 to 729312000 7293120 729312

112M QPSK 1 to 2527000 25270 2527 1 to 242592000 2425920 242592

16QAM 1 to 5055000 50550 5055 1 to 485280000 4852800 485280

32QAM 1 to 6313000 63130 6313 1 to 606048000 6060480 606048

64QAM 1 to 7583000 75830 7583 1 to 727968000 7292680 727968

128QAM 1 to 8841000 88410 8841 1 to 848736000 8487360 848736

256QAM 1 to 11375000 113750 11375 1 to 1092000000 10920000 1092000

512QAM 1 to 11375000 113750 11375 1 to 1092000000 10920000 1092000

1024QAM 1 to 15167000 151670 15167 1 to 1456032000 14560320 1456032

2048QAM 1 to 15167000 151670 15167 1 to 1456032000 14560320 1456032

40M QPSK 1 to 891000 8910 891 1 to 85536000 855360 85536

16QAM 1 to 1782000 17820 1782 1 to 171072000 1710720 171072

32QAM 1 to 2226000 22260 2226 1 to 213696000 2136960 213696

64QAM 1 to 2673000 26730 2673 1 to 256608000 2566080 256608

128QAM 1 to 3117000 31170 3117 1 to 299232000 2992320 299232

256QAM 1 to 4010000 40100 4010 1 to 384960000 3849600 384960

512QAM 1 to 4010000 40100 4010 1 to 384960000 3849600 384960

1024QAM 1 to 5242000 52420 5242 1 to 503232000 5032320 503232

2048QAM 1 to 5242000 52420 5242 1 to 503232000 5032320 503232

4096QAM 1 to 5242000 52420 5242 1 to 503232000 5032320 503232

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-28 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

Table 3-16 MODEM RF BBE TCA Threshold [MODEM-AV] (3/3)

Modulation Type 15 Min TCA Threshold 24H TCA Threshold

CS Modulation Range Default Threshold Range Default Threshold

Occur Recovery Occur Recovery

80M QPSK 1 to 1783000 17830 1783 1 to 171168000 1711680 171168

16QAM 1 to 3566000 35660 3566 1 to 342336000 3423360 342336

32QAM 1 to 4453000 44530 4453 1 to 427488000 4274880 427488

64QAM 1 to 5349000 53490 5349 1 to 513504000 5135040 513504

128QAM 1 to 6236000 62360 6236 1 to 598656000 5986560 598656

256QAM 1 to 8023000 80230 8023 1 to 770208000 7702080 770208

512QAM 1 to 8023000 80230 80230 1 to 770208000 7702080 770208

1024QAM 1 to 10487000 104870 10487 1 to 1006752000 10067520 1006752

2048QAM 1 to 10487000 104870 10487 1 to 1006752000 10067520 1006752

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 3-29

3.3.10.4 STM-1, E1 TCA Threshold


Table 3-17 STM-1/E1 TCA Threshold

Monitor Type 15 Min TCA Threshold 24H PM TCA Threshold

Range Default Threshold Range Default Threshold

Occur Recovery Occur Recovery

RS OFS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RS BBE 1 to 16777215 65534 6560 1 to 1610612640 6291260 629130

RS ES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RS SES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RS SEP 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

RS UAS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

DMR RS OFS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

DMR RS BBE 1 to 16777215 65534 6560 1 to 1610612640 6291260 629130

DMR RS ES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

DMR RS SES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

DMR RS SEP 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

DMR RS UAS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

MS BBE 1 to 16777215 65534 6560 1 to 1610612640 6291260 629130

MS ES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

MS SES 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

MS SEP 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

MS UAS 1 to 900 900 90 1 to 86400 65534 650

E1 CV 1 to 4294967295 65534 650 1 to 4294967295 6291260 629130

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
3-30/END ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

3.3.10.5 Ethernet Interface TCA Threshold


Table 3-18 LAN TCA Threshold

Monitor Type 15 Min TCA Threshold 24H TCA Threshold

Range Default Threshold Range Default Threshold

Drop Event 1 to 133929000 133929000 1 to 4294967295 4294967295

Undersize Packets 1 to 133929000 133929000 1 to 4294967295 4294967295

Fragment Packets 1 to 133929000 133929000 1 to 4294967295 4294967295

CRC Alignment Error 1 to 133929000 133929000 1 to 4294967295 4294967295

Oversize Packets 1 to 133929000 133929000 1 to 4294967295 4294967295

Collisions 1 to 133929000 133929000 1 to 4294967295 4294967295

GGS-000394-07E iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-1

4. CONTROL ITEMS

4.1 Overview
Following lists the control items available by the WebLCT, which is operational in
the Maintenance mode only. Note that operating these control items may cause a
traffic interruption if the system is in service.

Following are the Maintenance items provided by WebLCT:

4.1.1 Maintenance Control Menu

WebLCT Menu Section Providing the Description/Procedure

Loopback Control 4.3 Loopback Operation

MODEM Loopback 4.3.1 IF Loopback

L2 Loopback Control 4.3.3 L2 Loopback Control


(Loopback 1 / Loopback 2)

TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback 1) 4.3.2.1 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback1)

TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback 2) 4.3.2.2 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback2)

TDM Loopback Control 4.3.2.3 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback1)


(STM-1 Loopback 1)

TDM Loopback Control 4.3.2.4 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback2)


(STM-1 Loopback 2)

Link OAM Loop Back 4.3.4 Link OAM Loopback (Currently not available)

Protection Control 4.4 Switching Control

MODEM TX/RX Switch Control 4.4.2.1 TX Switch Manual Control (Currently not available)
4.4.2.2 RX Switch Manual Control (Currently not available)
4.4.2.3 Lock-In Control (Currently not available)

RSTP/MSTP Control 4.4.3 RSTP/MSTP Control

ERP Control 4.4.4 ERP Control

LAG Revert Control 4.4.5 LAG Revert Control

SNCP Switch Control 4.4.6 SNCP Switch Control

APS Switch Group Control 4.4.7 APS Switch Group Control

Timing Source Switch Control 4.4.8 Timing Source Switch Control

Linear Protection Control 4.4.9 MPLS-TP Linear Protection Control

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-2 CONTROL ITEMS

WebLCT Menu Section Providing the Description/Procedure

MODEM Maintenance Control 4.5 MODEM Maintenance Control (Radio Control)

4.5.1 ATPC Manual Control

4.5.2 TX Mute Control

4.5.3 CW Control

4.5.4 TX Modulation Manual Control (for AMR Mode only)

4.5.5 Reset XPIC

Laser Shutdown Control 4.6 Laser Shutdown Control

4.6.1 Laser Shutdown Control

4.6.2 ALS Manual Switch Control

OW Buzzer Control ——

H/W F/W Reset Control 4.7 Equipment Reset

H/W Reset Control 4.7.1 Reset H/W

F/W Reset Control 4.7.2 Reset F/W

Office Maintenance Control 4.8 Offline Maintenance (Currently not available)

4.8.1 DADE Adjustment

4.8.2 RF Sub Band Selection

4.8.3 Adjust X-DEM Delay

4.8.4 Adjust Delay Equalizer

PTP Domain Control 4.9 PTP Domain Control

Maintenance Test 4.10 Maintenance Test

ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control 4.10.1 ETH OAM

MPLS-TP OAM/LB/LT/DM/LM Control 4.10.2 MPLS-TP OAM

PMON/RMON Report 3.3 Performance Monitoring

MODEM PMON Report 3.3.2 MODEM PMON Report

E1 PMON Report 3.3.3 E1 PMON Report

STM-1 PMON Report 3.3.4 STM-1 PMON Report — MS/RS

ETH RMON Report 3.3.5 ETH RMON Report

VLAN Counter Report 3.3.6 VLAN Counter Report — VLAN Counter


3.3.7 VLAN Counter Report — Shaper Group Counter (Cur-
rently not available)

LSP Counter Report 3.3.8 LSP Counter Report

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-3

WebLCT Menu Section Providing the Description/Procedure

Metering 3.2 Current Metering

Current Metering

Equipment Utility 4.11 Equipment Utility

Export (NE –> Storage) Utility 4.11.1 Backup Database [Export (NE ➞ Storage) Utility]

Update (Storage –> NE) Utility 4.11.2 Update Database [Update (Storage➞ NE) Utility]

Program ROM Switching 4.11.3 Switch (Swap) Program ROM

USB Memory Utility 4.11.4 Check USB Memory Utility

Log Clear Function 4.11.5 Log Clear Function

Shipment 4.11.6 Restore Factory Default Settings

User Account See 2.2 User Management in the Set Network and System
Provisioning manual.

Inventory 4.12 Inventory

Equipment Inventory Information 4.12.1 Equipment Inventory Information

Software License Information 4.12.2 Software License Key Information

User Description 4.12.3 User Description

Software License Setup See 2.1 Setup Software License in the Set Network and
System Provisioning manual.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-4 CONTROL ITEMS

4.2 Before Starting Maintenance Operation

4.2.1 Wrist Strap Connection

iPASOLINK VR 4 equipment uses the electrostatic-sensitive devices. To prevent the


equipment from getting damages, wear an antistatic wrist strap and connect its cord
end to the ESD TERMINAL on the equipment:

Procedure 4-1

1. Wear an Antistatic Wrist Strap.

2. Connect the other end of the Strap to the ESD Ground Terminal (G):

Figure 4-1 ESD Ground Terminal Location

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-5

4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for WebLCT Operation)

Procedure 4-2

1. Launch the WebLCT. See the Operation manual for detailed steps.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the tool bar of WebLCT window.

Figure 4-2 WebLCT Main Window

Maintenance button

MAINT indication

3. Confirm that the MAINT indication on the upper side of WebLCT window
turns orange.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-6 CONTROL ITEMS

4. Confirm that the MAINT LED on the front of MC-AV Card turns amber:

Figure 4-3 iPASOLINK VR 4 Front View

MAINT LED

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-7

4.3 Loopback Operation


If an interruption occurs to traffic, use the SDH/SONET/PDH analyzers to isolate the
faulty section, and by check the traffic signal using the loopback function. Set up the
test equipment according to the following diagrams for PDH or SDH configuration.

In the facility loopback, a signal is looped back toward the baseband interface
direction. In the terminal loopback, a signal is looped back toward the Main Card
direction. They are performed at the STM-1 (SDH) or E1 (PDH) interfaces. (See
Notes 1, 2)

To execute the loopback control, set the system into the Maintenance mode.

Important:
To operate the Loopback Control, the system must be set into the Maintenance
mode;

4.3.1 IF Loopback

Execute the MODEM Loopback control to check the incoming traffic signal inside
MODEM interface (the traffic signal from E1 interfaces to wireless direction).

NOTES:

1. The MOD ALM and TX INPUT ALM will be un-masked as soon as releasing
the IF Loopback operation.

2. While operating the IF Loopback, the associated ODU is disabled.

3. When the IF Loopback is executed to the remotely connected site, the


remote connection will be disconnected, and the system does not restore
the connection by itself. So, it is necessary to set the IF Loopback Restore
Time in advance which restores releases the IF Loopback operation
automatically.

Figure 4-4 IF Loopback

E1/STM-1 Cross Connect MODEM ODU


SDH/SONET
ANALYZER

SDH/SONET
ANALYZER

IF LB

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-8 CONTROL ITEMS

4.3.1.1 Loopback Operation on Local Site

Procedure 4-1

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then expand
Loopback Control to select MODEM Loopback Control.

3. The MODEM Loopback Control window appears. Click an Off option of the IF
Loopback parameter under the target MODEM No. (or SW GRP).

Figure 4-5 MODEM Loopback Control Window

click

The MODEM Loopback Control option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-9

4. Click On radio button to enable the IF Loopback, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-6 MODEM Loopback Control Option Window

Parameter Value Description

IF Loopback On Turn on the IF Loopback function.

Off Turn off the IF Loopback function. [default]

Release Time No Limit Not to set the automatic restoration. This option is
not editable.

5. The Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-7 Warning Dialog Box

6. The Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-8 Information Dialog Box

The MODEM Loopback Control window updates the information.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-10 CONTROL ITEMS

7. Confirm that the status of IF Loopback of the target MODEM indicates On.

Figure 4-9 MODEM Loopback Control Window

8. When the loopback test ends, click the Maintenance tool button on the
WebLCT tool bar to exit from the Maintenance mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-11

4.3.1.2 Loopback Operation on Remote Site

Procedure 4-2

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then expand
Loopback Control to select MODEM Loopback Control.

3. The MODEM Loopback Control window appears. Click an Off option of the IF
Loopback parameter under the target MODEM No. (or SW GRP).

Figure 4-10 MODEM Loopback Control Window

click

The MODEM Loopback Control option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-12 CONTROL ITEMS

4. Click On radio button to enable the IF Loopback. then click the OK button.

Figure 4-11 MODEM Loopback Control Box

Parameter Value Description

IF Loopback On Turn on the IF Loopback function.

Off Turn off the IF Loopback function. [default]

Release Time * 90 [s] Sets 90 seconds to wait before restoring.

180 [s] Sets 180 seconds to wait before restoring.

300 [s] Sets 300 seconds (5 minutes) to wait before restoring.

60 [min] Sets 60 minutes to wait before restoring.

12 [h] Sets 12 hours to wait before restoring.

*: Release Time option is operational at a Remote NE only.

5. The Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-12 Information Dialog Box

6. The Warning dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-13 Warning Dialog Box

The Information dialog box appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-13

7. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-14 Information Dialog Box

The MODEM Loopback Control window updates the information.

8. Confirm that the status of IF Loopback of specified MODEM indicates On.

Figure 4-15 MODEM Loopback Control Window

9. When the loopback test ends, click Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT
tool bar to exit from the Maintenance Mode.

10. Confirm that the MAINT color turns from orange to white.

This step ends procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-14 CONTROL ITEMS

4.3.2 TDM Loopback Control

4.3.2.1 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback1)

Execute the TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback1) to check the incoming of E1
traffic signal inside E1 interfaces (The traffic signal from outside to E1 interfaces
direction).

NOTE: During the Loopback operation, the AIS is detected at down stream of the
specified channel (Loopback channel).

Figure 4-16 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback1)

E1/STM-1 Cross Connect MODEM ODU


E1
ANALYZER

E1
ANALYZER
LB1

Important:

To operate the Loopback Control, the system must be set into the
Maintenance mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while operating
the Loopback Control.

Procedure 4-3

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Loopback Control to select TDM Loopback Control (E1
Loopback1). The TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback1) window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-15

3. Click an Off option of the target E1 Loopback1 channel.

Figure 4-17 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback1) Window


click

The TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback) option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-16 CONTROL ITEMS

4. Click the On radio button to enable the E1 Loopback, then click the OK
button.

Figure 4-18 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback 1) Option Window

Table 4-1 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback 1) Parameter

Parameter Value Description

E1 Loopback1 On Turn on the E1 Loopback function.

Off Turn off the E1 Loopback function. [default]

5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-19 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-20 Information Dialog Box

The TDM Loopback Control window updates the information.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-17

7. Confirm that the status of the specified CH indicates On.

Figure 4-21 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopbak1) Window

8. To end the loopback test, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT
tool bar to exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-18 CONTROL ITEMS

4.3.2.2 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback2)

Execute the TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback2) to check the incoming of E1
traffic signal through MODEM IF (The traffic signal from wireless to E1 interfaces
direction).

Log in to the opposite site NE remotely, and execute Loopback2 from the opposite
site NE.

NOTE: During executing the Loopback operation, the AIS is detected at down stream of
the specified channel (Loopback channel).

Figure 4-22 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback2)

E1/STM-1 Cross Connect MODEM ODU

LB2

Important:

To operate the Loopback Control, the system must be set into the Maintenance
mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while operating the Loopback Control.

Procedure 4-4

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Loopback Control to select TDM Loopback Control (E1
Loopback2). The TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback2) window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-19

3. Click Off at the specified E1 Loopback2 Channel from the 16E1-A(Slot**)


field.

Figure 4-23 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback2) Window

click

TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback2) option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-20 CONTROL ITEMS

4. Click On radio button, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-24 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback 2) Box

Table 4-2 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback 2) Parameter

Parameter Value Description

E1 Loopback2 On Turn on the E1 Loopback2 function.

Off Turn off the E1 Loopback2 function. [default]

5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-25 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-26 Information Dialog Box

The TDM Loopback Control window updates the information.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-21

7. Check that the status of the selected CH indicates On.

Figure 4-27 TDM Loopback Control (E1 Loopback2) Window

8. To end the loopback test, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT
tool bar to exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-22 CONTROL ITEMS

4.3.2.3 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback1)

Execute the TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback1) to check the incoming of
TDM traffic signal inside STM-1 interfaces (The traffic signal from outside to STM-
1 interfaces direction).

NOTE: During executing the Loopback operation, the AIS is detected at down stream of
the specified channel (Loopback channel).

Figure 4-28 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback1)

E1/STM-1 Cross Connect MODEM ODU


SDH/SONET
ANALYZER

SDH/SONET
ANALYZER
LB1

Important:

To operate the Loopback Control, the system must be set into the Maintenance
mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while operating the Loopback Control.

Procedure 4-5

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Loopback Control to select TDM Loopback Control (STM-1
Loopback1). The TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback1) window
appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-23

3. Click Off in the APS GRP field.

Figure 4-29 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback1) Window


click

4. TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback1) option window appears. Click On


radio button, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-30 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback1) Box

Table 4-3 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback 1) Parameter

Parameter Value Description

STM-1 Loopback1 On Turn on the STM-1 Loopback1 function.

Off Turn off the STM-1 Loopback1 function. [default]

Warning dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-24 CONTROL ITEMS

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-31 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-32 Information Dialog Box

7. The TDM Loopback Control window updates the information. Check that the
status of the selected CH indicates On.

Figure 4-33 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback1) Window

8. To end the loopback test, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT
tool bar to exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-25

4.3.2.4 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback2)

Execute the TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback2) to check the incoming of
TDM traffic signal through MODEM IF (The traffic signal from wireless to STM-1
interfaces direction). STM-1 Loopback2 per channel (Channelized Loopback2) is
available as well.

Log in to the opposite site NE remotely, and execute STM-1 Loopback2 from the
opposite site NE.

NOTE: During executing the Loopback operation, the AIS is detected at down stream of
the specified channel (Loopback channel).

Figure 4-34 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback2)

E1/STM-1 Cross Connect MODEM ODU


PORT
LB2

Channelized LB2

Important:

To operate the Loopback Control, the system must be set into the
Maintenance mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while operating
the Loopback Control.

Procedure 4-6

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Loopback Control to select TDM Loopback Control (STM-1
Loopback2). The TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback2) window
appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-26 CONTROL ITEMS

3. Click Off in the STM-1 A field.

Figure 4-35 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback2) Window


click

4. TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback2) option window appears. Click On


radio button, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-36 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback2) Option Box

Table 4-4 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback 2) Parameter

Parameter Value Description

STM-1 Loopback2 On Turn on the STM-1 Loopback2 function.

Off Turn off the STM-1 Loopback2 function. [default]

Target (available object) E1 Channel Number and KLM Number on the


selected STM-1.

Warning dialog box appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-27

5. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-37 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-38 Information Dialog Box

7. The TDM Loopback Control window updates the information. Check that the
status of the selected CH indicates On.

Figure 4-39 TDM Loopback Control (STM-1 Loopback2) Window

8. To end the loopback test, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT
tool bar to exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-28 CONTROL ITEMS

4.3.3 L2 Loopback Control

NOTE: This option is currently not available for the ports whose MPLS-TP Port Mode is
NNI in the MPLS-TP Mode
This operation carries out the loopbacks for Layer 2 level. Incoming Layer 2 frames
are looped to the source direction with MAC Destination and Source Address Swap.
iPASOLINK provides two modes for L2 Loopback Control:
 Loopback 1 Mode: Loops frames back at near side of the L2SW.
 Loopback 2 Mode: Loops frames back at far side of the L2SW. The selected
ports must be operative. In this mode, the available frame size to operate the L2
Loopback is the maximum frame size minus 16 bytes. The maximum frame size
is specified by the 8.2.2 Max Frame Size Setting in the Set Network and
System Provisioning manual. This option is currently not available for the
ports whose MPLS-TP Port Mode is NNI in the MPLS-TP Mode.

Procedure 4-7

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Loopback Control to select L2 Loopback Control. The L2
Loopback Control window appears.

3. Click Loopback Control.

Figure 4-40 L2 Loopback Control Window


click

L2 Loopback Control >> Step 1 option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-29

4. Select a port to execute the Loopback operation, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-41 L2 Loopback Control >> Step 1 Option Window

5. L2 Loopback Control >> Step 2 option window appears. Specify the


parameters, then click the OK button.
Figure 4-42 L2 Loopback Control >> Step 2 Option Window

Table 4-5 L2 Loopback Control Parameters

Parameter Value Description


Loopback Mode Port Loopback Operates a port loopback.
VLAN Loopback Operates a VLAN loopback.
L2 Loopback Loopback1 Loops back at the near side of the L2SW.
Loopback2 Loops back at the far side of the L2SW. In this mode, the available
fame size to loopback is the maximum frame size that is specified by
Max Frame Size Setting (see 8.2.2 Max Frame Size Setting in the
Set Network and System Provisioning manual) minus 16 bytes.
Release Time * No Limit Keeps L2 Loopback operation.
90 [s] Sets 90 seconds to wait before restoring.
180 [s] Sets 180 seconds to wait before restoring.
300 [s] Sets 300 seconds (5 minutes) to wait before restoring.
60 [min] Sets 60 minutes to wait before restoring.
12 [h] Sets 12 hours to wait before restoring.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-30 CONTROL ITEMS

6. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-43 Warning Dialog Box

7. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-44 Information Dialog Box

8. L2 Loopback Control window updates the information.

Figure 4-45 L2 Loopback Control Window

9. When the loopback test ends, click Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT
tool bar to exit from the Maintenance Mode.

10. Confirm that the MAINT color turns from orange to white.

This step ends procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-31

4.3.4 Link OAM Loopback


NOTE: When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, this function is currently not
available.
To operate the Link OAM Loopback, the Link OAM Mode must be enabled and be
active. Check or enable the Link OAM function referring to the Set Network and
System Provisioning manual; 8.6.4 LINK OAM Setting.
Figure 4-46 Link OAM Loopback Configuration

iPASOLINK VR 4 iPASOLINK VR 4
(IDU) (IDU)

MODEM #2 MODEM #2

MODEM #1 MODEM #1

MAIN BOARD MAIN BOARD


ETHERNET PORT ETHERNET PORT

LOOPBACK

Procedure 4-8
1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control, then expand
Loopback Control to select Link OAM Loopback Control.

The Link OAM Loopback Control window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-32 CONTROL ITEMS

3. Click a linked Off in the Loopback Status field.


Figure 4-47 Link OAM Loopback Control Window
click

4. Link OAM Loopback Control option window appears. Click On radio button,
then click the OK button.

Figure 4-48 Link OAM Loopback Control Option Box

5. When Information dialog box appears, click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-49 Information Dialog Box

The Link OAM Loopback Control window updates the information.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-33

6. Check that the status of the selected port indicates On (Active).

Figure 4-50 Link OAM Loopback Control Window

 To End Link OAM Loopback Test

7. Click the On (Active). The Link OAM Loopback Control option window
appears.

8. Select Off, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-51 Link OAM Loopback Control Option Window

9. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-52 Information Dialog Box

The Link OAM Loopback Control window updates the information.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-34 CONTROL ITEMS

10. Confirm that the selected port indicates Off now.

Figure 4-53 Link OAM Loopback Control Window

11. When completed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar
to exit from the Maintenance Mode.

12. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-35

4.4 Switching Control

Important:

While operating the Switching Control Operation, the system must be set into the
Maintenance mode.

4.4.1 Manual Switch Operation

iPASOLINK VR supports the following eight types of Manual Switches:

 TX Switch Manual Control: 1+1 Hot Standby


(*TX Switch Manual Control is currently not available)

 RX Switch Manual Control: 1+1 Hot Standby


1+1 Twin Path
(* RX Switch Manual Control is currently not available)

 Lock-In Control: 1+1 Hot Standby


1+1 Twin Path
RTA Physical Layer
(* Lock-in Control is currently not available.)

 RSTP/MSTP Control1

 ERP Control

 LAG Revert Control

 SNCP Switch Control: SNCP Mode (E1) Configuration only

 SNCP Switch Control: STM-1 only

 Timing Source Switch Control

 MPLS-TP Linear Protection Control

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-36 CONTROL ITEMS

4.4.2 MODEM TX/RX Switch Control2


NOTE: When the Equipment Mode is set to MPLS-TP, this function is currently not
available.

4.4.2.1 TX Switch Manual Control

This operation manually switches and fixes the TX SW in the 1+1 Hot Standby
configuration.
e.g., MODEM No.1 and No.2 configure the 1+1 HS mode, where the MODEM No.1
takes the working side, and MODEM No.2 takes the standby side.

Procedure 4-9

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then expand
Protection Control to select MODEM TX/RX Switch Control. The MODEM TX/
RX Switch Control window appears.

4. Click the link in the TX SW Manual Control field:

Figure 4-54 MODEM TX/RX Switch Control Window


click

MODEM TX/RX Switch Control option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-37

5. Select Forced - No. 1 or Forced - No. 2 from the TX SW Manual Control drop-
down list, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-55 MODEM TX/RX Switch Control Option Window

Parameter Value Description

TX SW Manual Control Clear Clears the executed switching command.

Forced - No. 1 Switches to the odd-numbered slot.

Forced - No. 2 Switches to the even-numbered slot.

6. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

Figure 4-56 Warning Dialog Box

7. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to
proceed.

Figure 4-57 Information Dialog Box

The MODEM TX/RX Switch Control window updates the information.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-38 CONTROL ITEMS

8. Verify the displayed information:

Figure 4-58 MODEM TX/RX Switch Control Window

9. Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the


window.

10. Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-39

4.4.2.2 RX Switch Manual Control

NOTE: This switch operation is supported for the 1+1 TP/HS mode only. e.g., MODEM
No.1 and No.2 configure the 1+1 TP mode, where the MODEM No.1 takes the
working side, and MODEM No.2 takes the standby side.

Procedure 4-10

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then expand
Protection Control to select MODEM TX/RX Switch Control. The MODEM TX/
RX Switch Control window appears.

4. Click the link in the RX SW Manual Control field:

Figure 4-59 MODEM TX/RX Switch Control Window

click

MODEM TX/RX Switch Control option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-40 CONTROL ITEMS

5. Select an option from the RX SW Manual Control drop-down list, then click
the OK button.

Figure 4-60 MODEM TX/RX Switch Control Option Window

Parameter Value Description

RX SW Manual Control Clear Clears the executed switching command.

Manual - No. 1 Switches to the odd-numbered slot if available.

Manual - No. 2 Switches to the even-numbered slot if available.

Forced - No. 1 Switches to the odd-numbered slot.

Forced - No. 2 Switches to the eve-numbered slot.

6. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

Figure 4-61 Warning Dialog Box

7. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to
proceed.

Figure 4-62 Information Dialog Box

The MODEM TX/RX Switch Control window updates the information.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-41

8. Verify the displayed information:

Figure 4-63 MODEM TX/RX Switch Control Window

9. Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the


window.

10. Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-42 CONTROL ITEMS

4.4.2.3 Lock-In Control

This operation puts and fixes the MODEM Card into the online mode when its
associated MODEM Card needs to be dismounted, which is in the 1+1 Hot Standby,
1+1 Twin Path, or the RTA Physical Layer configuration.

Procedure 4-11

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Protection Control to select MODEM TX/RX Switch Control. The
MODEM TX/RX Switch Control window appears.

4. Click the link in the Lock-in Control field:

Figure 4-64 MODEM TX/RX Switch Control Window

click

MODEM TX/RX Switch Control option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-43

5. Select an option from the Lock-in Control drop-down list, then click the OK
button.

Figure 4-65 MODEM TX/RX Switch (Lock-in) Control Option Window

Table 4-6 MODEM TX/RX Switch (Lock-in) Control Parameter

Parameter Value Description

Lock-in Control Off Disables the Lock-in Control function.

No. 1 Lock-in Executes lock-in to the odd-numbered slot.

No. 2 Lock-in Executes lock-in to the even-numbered slot.

6. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

Figure 4-66 Warning Dialog Box

7. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to
proceed.

Figure 4-67 Information Dialog Box

The MODEM TX/RX Switch Control window updates the information.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-44 CONTROL ITEMS

8. Verify the displayed information:

Figure 4-68 MODEM TX/RX Switch Control Window

9. Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the


window.

10. Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-45

4.4.3 RSTP/MSTP Control

This option clears the current STP information, and newly gets the protocol.

Procedure 4-12

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Protection Control to select RSTP/MSTP Control. The RSTP/MSTP
Control window appears.

4. Click the RSTP Clear or MSTP Clear tool button:

Figure 4-69 RSTP/MSTP Control Window (example: MSTP)

RSTP Clear tool button

5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

Figure 4-70 Warning Dialog Box

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-46 CONTROL ITEMS

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to
proceed.

Figure 4-71 Information Dialog Box

7. The RSTP/MSTP Control window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information:

Figure 4-72 RSTP/MSTP Control Window (1/2 leftmost)

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-47

Figure 4-73 RSTP/MSTP Control Window (2/2 rightmost)

8. Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the


window.

9. Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-48 CONTROL ITEMS

4.4.4 ERP Control

4.4.4.1 Execute ERP Switching Operation

Proceed with the following to carry out the ERP Manual/Forced Switching
Operation.

Procedure 4-13

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Protection Control to select ERP Control. The ERP Control
window appears.

4. Click the target Ring ID.

Figure 4-74 ERP Control Window

Ring ID

ERP Control (Ring IDn) option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-49

5. Specify the following:

Figure 4-75 ERP Control Option Window

Manual Control drop-down list and


Block Port radio buttons

 Select the operation type from the Manual Control drop-down list.
 Assign a blocking port.

Table 4-7 ERP Control Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Manual Control Forced SW Executes switching operation forcibly.

Manual SW Executes switching operation according to the condition’s priority.

Clear Clears the status placed by the executed command.

Block Port Ring Port 0 Assigns a blocking port in the Ring.

Ring Port 1

6. When completed, click the OK button of the option window.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-50 CONTROL ITEMS

7. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-76 Warning Dialog Box

8. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to
proceed.

Figure 4-77 Information Dialog Box

9. The ERP Control window updates the information. Verify the displayed
information.

Figure 4-78 ERP Control Window

(leftmost field)

(rightmost filed)

10. Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the
window.

11. Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-51

4.4.4.2 Execute Loop Detection

This option is used to verify the registered ERP.

Procedure 4-14

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Protection Control to select ERP Control. The ERP Control
window appears.

4. Click the Loop Detection Restart tool button.

Figure 4-79 ERP Control Window

Loop Detection Restart tool button

ERP Control (Loop Detection Restart) option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-52 CONTROL ITEMS

5. Tick a check box of the target Ring, then click the OK button. Clicking the
check box on top selects all.

Figure 4-80 ERP Control (Loop Detection Restart) Option Window

check boxes

6. The system starts checking the loop on the selected Ring. When completed,
Information dialog box appears.

7. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-81 Information Dialog Box

The ERP Control window updates the window.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-53

8. Check the result in the Loop Detection Status.

Figure 4-82 ERP Control Window

Loop Detection Status

 This field normally indicates None.


 If a loop is found, the field indicated Detected. Check the settings.

9. Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the


window.

10. Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-54 CONTROL ITEMS

4.4.5 LAG Revert Control

This option is used to put the original Active ETH Port back in service manually
when recovered from the failure.

Procedure 4-15

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Protection Control to select LAG Revert Control. The LAG Revert
Control window appears.

4. Click the target group from the LAG column

Figure 4-83 LAG Revert Control Window

click to select a target

LAG Revert Control option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-55

5. Click the OK button of the option window.

Figure 4-84 LAG Revert Control Option Window

OK button

6. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-85 Warning Dialog Box

The reverting command is executed.

7. When completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to end
the procedure.

Figure 4-86 Information Dialog Box

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-56 CONTROL ITEMS

4.4.6 SNCP Switch Control

This operation is available for SNCP Mode (E1) Configuration only. The 1+1
Protection configured by Radio Interfaces cannot use SNCP.

Procedure 4-16

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Protection Control to select SNCP Switch Control. The SNCP
Switch Control window appears.

4. Click the desired Service No. to configure:

Figure 4-87 SNCP Switch Control Window

click

SNCP Switch Control option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-57

5. From the SNCP Manual SW Control drop-down list, select an option, then
click the OK button.

Figure 4-88 SNCP Switch Control Option Window

SNCP Manual SW Control drop-down list

Table 4-8 SNCP Switch Control Parameter

Parameter Value Description

SNCP Manual Clear Clears the executed switching command.


SW Control
Forced SW to Protection Switches to the Protection side.

Forced SW to Work Switches to the Work side.

Manual SW to Protection Switches to the Protection side if available.

Manual SW to Work Switches to the Work side if available.

6. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

Figure 4-89 Warning Dialog Box

7. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to
proceed.

Figure 4-90 Information Dialog Box

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-58 CONTROL ITEMS

8. The SNCP Switch Control window updates the information. Verify the
displayed information:

Figure 4-91 SNCP Switch Control Window

(leftmost field)

(rightmost field)

9. Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the


window.

10. Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-59

4.4.7 APS Switch Group Control

This operation is available by STM-1 only.

Procedure 4-17

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then expand
Protection Control to select APS Switch Group Control. The APS Switch
Group Control window appears.

4. Click the desired APS GRP to configure:

Figure 4-92 APS Switch Group Control Window

APS GRP Numbers

APS Switch Group Control option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-60 CONTROL ITEMS

5. From the APS Manual SW Control drop-down list, select Manual SW to


Protection or Forced SW to Protection, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-93 APS Switch Group Control Option Window

APS Manual SW Group Control drop-down list

Table 4-9 APS Switch Group Control Parameter

Parameter Value Description

SNCP Manual Clear Clears the executed switching command.


SW Control
Forced SW to Protection Switches to the Protection side.

Forced SW to Work Switches to the Work side.

Manual SW to Protection Switches to the Protection side if available.

Manual SW to Work Switches to the Work side if available.

6. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

Figure 4-94 Warning Dialog Box

7. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to
proceed.

Figure 4-95 Information Dialog Box

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-61

8. The APS Switch Group Control window updates the information. Verify the
displayed information:

Figure 4-96 APS Switch Group Control Window

9. Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the


window.

10. Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-62 CONTROL ITEMS

4.4.8 Timing Source Switch Control

4.4.8.1 Unlock the Mode


Operate this Procedure 4-18 if the equipment is in the Lockout mode. Otherwise,
skip this procedure, and go to Procedure 4-19 provided in 4.4.8.2 Switch Timing
Sources.

Procedure 4-18

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Protection Control to select Timing Source Switch Control. The
Timing Source Switch Control window appears.

4. If the target facility is locked (Lock Out indicates On), click the link. If it is not
locked (Lock Out indicates Off), go to 4.4.8.2 Switch Timing Sources

Figure 4-97 Timing Source Switch Control Window

select a number of the target to unlock

5. Timing Source Switch Control option window appears. Click the Off radio
button, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-98 Timing Source Switch Control Option Window

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-63

6. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

Figure 4-99 Warning Dialog Box

7. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to
proceed.

Figure 4-100 Information Dialog Box

8. The Timing Source Switch Control window updates the information. Verify that
the Lock Out status of the target object indicates Off now.

Figure 4-101 Timing Source Switch Control Window

9. Operate one of the following:


 To end the procedure:

i) Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the


window.

ii) Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white. This step ends the
procedure.
 To set Timing Source Switch, go to Procedure 4-19 in 4.4.8.2 Switch Timing
Sources, Step 3.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-64 CONTROL ITEMS

4.4.8.2 Switch Timing Sources

Procedure 4-19

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control, then its
submenu Protection Control to select Timing Source Switch Control. The
Timing Source Switch Control window appears.

4. Click a link in the Timing Source SW Control field.:

NOTE: The target object must NOT be in the Lockout mode.

Figure 4-102 Timing Source Switch Control Window


click

5. Timing Source Switch Control option window appears. Select a switching


mode (Manual SW or Forced SW), then click the OK button.

Figure 4-103 Timing Source Switch Control Option Window

Warning dialog box appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-65

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box.

Figure 4-104 Warning Dialog Box

7. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to
proceed.

Figure 4-105 Information Dialog Box

8. The Timing Source Switch Control window updates the information. Verify that
the selected switch control is indicated for the target object.

Figure 4-106 Timing Source Switch Control Window

9. Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the


window.

10. Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white.
This step ends the procedure.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-66 CONTROL ITEMS

4.4.9 MPLS-TP Linear Protection Control

4.4.9.1 Priority of Each Switching State

When the system selects the MPLS-TP mode, iPASOLINK VR supports the Linear
Protection of 1:1 Bidirectional, conforming to ITU-T G.8131. Following show the
switching priorities that iPASOLINK VR uses:

Table 4-10 MPLS-TP Linear Protection Switching Priorities

Priority Switching Status Location Description

1 Clear Local ——

2 Lock Out of Protection Local/Remote Protection switching cannot be carried out

3 Auto-Switch (SFDc) Local Signal failure or degradation is cleared.

Auto-Switch (SF-P) Local/Remote Auto Switching has been carried out due
4
to Signal Failure on the Protection side.
HIGH
 Forced Switch to Protection Local/Remot Forced Switching to Protection side has
5
been executed.

Auto-Switch (WORK) Local/Remote Auto Switching to Working side has been


6 carried out due to Signal Failure on the
Working side.

Manual Switch to Protection Local/Remote Manual Switching to Protection side has


been executed.
 7
LOW Manual Switch to Working Manual Switch has been executed to the
Working side.

Wait-to-Restore Expired Local Wait-to-Restore runs out of the specified


8
period.

9 Wait-to-Restore Local Wait-to-Restore timer is running.

10 NR Local/Remote No Request.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-67

4.4.9.2 Set Manual Switching Control

Procedure 4-20

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control to select
Linear Protection Control.

4. The Linear Protection Control window appears. Click the target APS GRP
No. link.

Figure 4-107 Linear Protection Control Window

APS GRP No.

5. APS Switch Group Control option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-68 CONTROL ITEMS

6. Select a switching type from the APS Manual SW Control drop-down list,
then click OK button.

Figure 4-108 APS Switch Group Control Option Window

Table 4-11 APS Switch Group Control Parameter

Parameter Value Description

APS Manual SW Clear Clears the executed switching command.


Control
Lockout of Protection Prevents switching the data traffic to the Protection side.

Forced SW Forcibly switches the data traffic to the Work side.

Manual SW to Protection Switches the data traffic to the Protection side if available.

Manual SW to Work Switches the data traffic to the Work side if available.

7. Warning dialog box appears. Check the system if it is okay to proceed this
operation, then click the OK button of the dialog box.

Figure 4-109 Warning Dialog Box

8. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to
proceed.

Figure 4-110 Information Dialog Box

The Linear Protection Control window updates the information.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-69

9. Verify the displayed information:


Figure 4-111 Linear Protection Control Window

Scrolled to rightmost field)

NOTE: Under the APS Manual Control, a path state should be determined according to
the Switching Priority. If no changes are detected, the path state may have been
placed at the top of switching priorities. Refer to Table 4-10 MPLS-TP Linear
Protection Switching Priorities for details.

10. Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the
window.

11. Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-70 CONTROL ITEMS

4.5 MODEM Maintenance Control (Radio Control)

There are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance
Mode.

The function of each control is as follows; These windows are not enabled if the
system is not in the Maintenance mode.

 ATPC Manual Control


If TX Power Control Mode is selected to ATPC Mode, execute temporally fix control
to transmit Power. Select the value range described in ( ) of ATPC Range that located
in the Provisioning Menu (MODEM Function setting -> TX Power Setting) for
Transmit Power. ATPC Manual Control can be selected from either Auto or Manual.
If transmit Power requires to temporally fix control, select Manual then select fixed
value (it will be fixed until Auto is selected).

NOTE: ATPC Manual Control is not effective if MTPC Mode is selected.

 TX Mute Control
Despite the equipment configuration setting, forcing the TX Mute Control to ON will
stop the transmit power of the ODU.

If Mute Control is set to OFF, it will cancel the Mute control.

NOTES:
1. If Mute Control is set to off and Mute OFF does not work due to uncontrollable
factors, Mute status will remain on.

2. In case of 1+1 HS configuration, the Mute OFF control does not mute both lines.
Moreover, when forced Mute is controlled in No.1/No.2, Maintenance Mode cannot set
to OFF.

3. When TX Mute is remotely controlled, the setting of the automatic restoration time is
possible. Therefore, TX Mute Release Time should be set.

4. TX Mute Release Time is set together with TX Mute Control by the item that becomes
effective only when TX Mute Control is done from a higher-level device.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-71

 CW Control
CW (no transmission modulation) is controlled.

It is used when the frequency is measured with a frequency counter and when
spurious one is checked.

If you perform the CW control over a pre-made Mute ON, execute CW ON/OFF after
Mute OFF. At this time, when there is a factor that the CW control is not turned ON it
becomes CW control error.

In addition, in case of remote connection and operated Control CW, it may not be
able to recover again. CW Control will restore automatically according to the TX
Mute Release Time parameter.

 TX Modulation Manual Control


The flat rate of the transmission modulation method of the control station in the AMR
mode is temporarily managed.

The modulation method can be set according to the target device regardless of the
AMR Range setting.

Under the 1+0 configuration, each Slot#/Slot# is individually controlled.

This control is done by exchanging request/answer of the control between local/


remote stations as well as LB2.

When the TX Modulation Manual Control setting is returned from Manual to Auto,
the fixed modulation method is returned to QPSK.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-72 CONTROL ITEMS

4.5.1 ATPC Manual Control

Performing this function (Manual Control) sets the Maintenance Mode to ON.

However, in case of Auto setting and if Maintenance Mode is set to OFF, it will
cancel the "auto setting."

Procedure 4-21

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control to select
MODEM Maintenance Control. The MODEM Maintenance Controlwindow
appears.

3. Select Off in the ATPC Manual Control option.

Figure 4-112 MODEM Maintenance Control Window

click

The MODEM Maintenance Control option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-73

4. Set the appropriate values, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-113 MODEM Maintenance Control Option Window

Table 4-12 ATPC Manual Control

Parameter Value Description

ATPC Manual Control On Enable/Disable ATPC Manual Control.

Off

ATPC Manual Power (range of values varies Set the transmit power value. [unit: dBm]
depending on ODU type)

5. Warning dialog box appears.Click the OK button.

Figure 4-114 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-115 Information Dialog Box

The MODEM Maintenance Control window updates the information.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-74 CONTROL ITEMS

7. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Figure 4-116 MODEM Maintenance Control Window

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-75

4.5.2 TX Mute Control

4.5.2.1 TX Mute Control on Local Site

Procedure 4-22

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control to select
MODEM Maintenance Control. The MODEM Maintenance Control window
appears.

3. Select Off in the TX Mute Control option.

Figure 4-117 MODEM Maintenance Control Window

click

The MODEM Maintenance Control option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-76 CONTROL ITEMS

4. Set the appropriate values, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-118 MODEM Maintenance Control Box

Table 4-13 TX MuteControl

Parameter Value Description

TX Mute Control On Executes the forced mute.

Off Releases the forced mute. [default]

Release Time No Limit No limitation to auto recovery. This option is not editable.

5. Warning dialog box appears. Click OK button.


Figure 4-119 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.


Figure 4-120 Information Dialog Box

The MODEM Maintenance Control window updates the information.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-77

7. Confirm the displayed parameters.


Figure 4-121 MODEM Maintenance Control Window

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-78 CONTROL ITEMS

4.5.2.2 TX Mute Control Operation on Remote Site

Procedure 4-23

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control to select
MODEM Maintenance Control. The MODEM Maintenance Control window
appears.

3. Select Off in the TX Mute Control option.

Figure 4-122 MODEM Maintenance Control Window

click

The MODEM Maintenance Control option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-79

4. Set the appropriate values, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-123 MODEM Maintenance Control Box

Table 4-14 TX Mute Control

Parameter Value Description

TX Mute Control On Executes the forced mute.

Off Releases the forced mute. [default]

Release Time 90 [s] Provides 90 seconds before executing the auto-recovery.

180 [s] Provides 180 seconds before executing the auto-recovery.

300 [s] Provides 300 seconds before executing the auto-recovery.

60 [min] Provides 60 minutes before executing the auto-recovery.

12 [h] Provides 12 hours before executing the auto-recovery.

5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-124 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-125 Information Dialog Box

The MODEM Maintenance Control window updates the information.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-80 CONTROL ITEMS

7. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Figure 4-126 MODEM Maintenance Control Window

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-81

4.5.3 CW Control

Procedure 4-24
NOTE: This function is not operative by the remote session.

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control to select
MODEM Maintenance Control. The MODEM Maintenance Control window
appears.
3. Select Off in the CW Control option.

Figure 4-127 MODEM Maintenance Control Window

click

The MODEM Maintenance Control option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-82 CONTROL ITEMS

4. Set the appropriate values, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-128 MODEM Maintenance Control Box

Table 4-15 CW Control

Parameter Value Description

CW Control On Executes the controlling CW.

Off Releases the controlling CW. [default]

CW Control No Limit Specifies no limitation to auto recovery. (Not recommended.) NOTE: These
Release Time values are not
90 [s] Provides 90 seconds before executing the auto-recovery. available for
the local
180 [s] Provides 180 seconds before executing the auto-recovery.
connection.
300 [s] Provides 300 seconds before executing the auto-recovery.

60 [min] Provides 60 minutes before executing the auto-recovery.

12 [h] Provides 12 hours before executing the auto-recovery.

5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-129 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click OK button.

Figure 4-130 Information Dialog Box

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-83

7. The MODEM Maintenance Control window updates the information. Verify the
displayed parameters.

Figure 4-131 MODEM Maintenance Control Window

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-84 CONTROL ITEMS

4.5.4 TX Modulation Manual Control (for AMR Mode only)

Procedure 4-25
1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control to select


MODEM Maintenance Control. The MODEM Maintenance Control window
appears.

3. Click the link in the TX Modulation Manual Control option.

Figure 4-132 MODEM Maintenance Control Window

click

The MODEM Maintenance Control option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-85

4. Set the appropriate values, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-133 MODEM Maintenance Control Box

Table 4-16 TX Modulation Manual Control

Parameter Value Description

TX Modulation Man- Auto Disables manual controls.


ual Control
QPSK If Manual control is executed, select the modulation
method.
16QAM
Available values differ according to the specified
32QAM Channel Spacing values.

64QAM

128QAM

256QAM

512QAM

1024QAM

2048QAM

5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-134 Warning Dialog Box

Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-86 CONTROL ITEMS

6. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-135 Information Dialog Box

7. The MODEM Maintenance Control window updates the information. Verify the
displayed parameters.

Figure 4-136 MODEM Maintenance Control Window

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-87

4.5.5 Reset XPIC

Procedure 4-26
1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control to select
MODEM Maintenance Control. The MODEM Maintenance Control window
appears.

3. Select an option from XPIC Reset operation.

Figure 4-137 MODEM Maintenance Control Window

click

4. The MODEM Maintenance Control option window appears. Select Forced


Reset by clicking its radio button, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-138 MODEM Maintenance Control Option Window

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-88 CONTROL ITEMS

Table 4-17 XPIC Reset

Parameter Value Description

XPIC Reset Forced Reset Forcibly resets the XPIC function. In this state, a
signal from ODU is output as it is.

Auto [default]

5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button.


Figure 4-139 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.


Figure 4-140 Information Dialog Box

7. The MODEM Maintenance Control window updates the information. Verify the
displayed parameters.
Figure 4-141 MODEM Maintenance Control Window

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white. This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-89

4.6 Laser Shutdown Control


This subsection describes the procedures to set up the Laser Management functions.

Following Laser management items can be enabled using WebLCT:

 Laser Shutdown Control


Forcibly shuts down the optical outputs of STM-1 (OPT).

 ALS Restart (for Remote Operation only)


For SDH optical interface, the ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) control performs
the resumption of optical power for a definite period of time.
ALS functionality is effective only for Optical SDH STM-1 INTFC.
In addition, this function operates under ALS control execution (optical power
shutdown). If ALS is not activated, the control is not carried out.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-90 CONTROL ITEMS

4.6.1 Laser Shutdown Control

Procedure 4-27

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control to select
Laser Shutdown Control. The Laser Shutdown Control window appears.

3. Select Off in the Forced Laser Shutdown Control option.

Figure 4-142 Laser Shutdown Control Window


n

click

4. Laser Shutdown Control option window appears. Set On or Off by clicking its
radio button, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-143 Laser Shutdown Control Option Window

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-91

Table 4-18 Forced Laser Shutdown Control

Parameter Value Description

Forced Laser Shut- ON Forcibly shuts down the STM-1 optical outputs.
down Control
Off Normal operation

5. Warning dialog box appears.Click the OK button.

Figure 4-144 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-145 Information Dialog Box

7. The Laser Shutdown Control window updates the information. Verify the
displayed parameters.

Figure 4-146 Laser Shutdown Control Window

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-92 CONTROL ITEMS

4.6.2 ALS Manual Switch Control

Procedure 4-28

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control to select
Laser Shutdown Control. The Laser Shutdown Control window appears.

3. Select Control in the ALS Restart option.

Figure 4-147 Laser Shutdown Control Window

click

4. Laser Shutdown Control option window appears. Select a proper value for the
ALS Restart parameter, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-148 Laser Shutdown Control Option Window

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-93

Table 4-19 ALS Restart

Parameter Value Description

ALS Restart 2s Forcibly issues the optical output for 2 seconds where the
ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) is executed.

90s Forcibly issues the optical output for 90 seconds where the
ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) is executed.

5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-149 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-150 Information Dialog Box

7. The Laser Shutdown Control window updates the information. Verify the
displayed parameters.

Figure 4-151 Laser Shutdown Control

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white. This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-94 CONTROL ITEMS

4.7 Equipment Reset


Following describes the hardware (H/W) and firmware (F/W) Reset Control of
iPASOLINK VR 4.

Reset control is available only when the system is set in the Maintenance mode. If it
is not in the Maintenance mode, executing the reset control will result in the error
response. Following are the modules and available control operations:

Configuration Data to Upload

Control Tasks
Module
Reset CPU Reset H/W Switch Program ROM

Main Card YES YES YES

ODU YES YES YES

MODEM-A/EA NO YES NO

STM-1A NO YES NO

16E1-A NO YES NO

GbE-A NO YES NO

MSE-A NO YES NO

 H/W Reset Control


 Card Reset
Available to control each option card individually. Main ETH signal will be
downed during the resetting. After Card Reset finished, option card need to be
reset the configuration information that retains by IDU. Card Reset replies NG
response and is not executed if option card has been not registered, not mounted,
or mounted different place.

 F/W Reset Control


 CPU Reset (ODU)
Available to reset CPU (ODU) and control each ODU individually. Main signal
will be downed during the resetting. After CPU Reset (ODU) finished, ODU
need to be reset the configuration information that retains by IDU (MB/CTRL).
CPU Reset (ODU) replies NG response and is not executed if MODEM is not
mounted (including not registered or mounted different place).
 CPU Reset (IDU)
Available to reset CPU of IDU (Main/CTRL). Main ETH signal and NMS
Communications will be downed after CPU Reset (IDU) is executed.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-95

4.7.1 Reset H/W


 Proceeding through the following for the Main Card [MC-AV] in the Active
mode terminates the WebLCT and restarts iPASOLINK VR 4.
 Where the Main Card [MC-AV] is duplicated having a Standby Card, proceeding
through the following causes switching between Active Card and Standby Card.

Procedure 4-29

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control, then expand
F/W_R/W Reset Control to select H/W Reset Control. The H/W Reset Control
window appears.

3. Click the target object link under the Item column.

Figure 4-152 H/W Reset Control Window

click

H/W Reset Control option window for the selected object appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-96 CONTROL ITEMS

4. Verify the information, and click the OK button.

Figure 4-153 H/W Reset Control Option Window


(example: Main Card 1 as Active)

5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-154 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-155 Information Dialog Box

(when restarting Main Card)

 When the selected target is Main Card, WebLCT window disappears, and the
session is terminated. This step ends the procedure.
 For other objects, the H/W Reset Control window returns.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-97

7. Open the H/W Reset Control window, and verify the information.

Figure 4-156 H/W Reset Control Window

8. Release the Maintenance Mode if necessary.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-98 CONTROL ITEMS

4.7.2 Reset F/W

4.7.2.1 Reset CPU (IDU)


 Proceeding through the following for the Main Card [MC-AV] in the Active side
terminates the WebLCT and restarts iPASOLINK VR 4.

Procedure 4-30

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control, then expand
H/W_F/W Reset Control to select F/W Reset Control. The F/W Reset Control
window appears.

3. Click Main Card link in the Item field.

Figure 4-157 F/W Reset Control Window

click

F/W Reset Control (Main Card) option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-99

4. Confirm the information then click OK button.

Figure 4-158 F/W Reset Control (Main Card) Option Window

5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button.


 When the target object is the Main Card [MC-AV] in the Active mode,
iPASOLINK VR 4 will be restarted.

Figure 4-159 Warning Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-160 Information Box

 When the target object is the Main Card [MC-AV] in the Active mode, the
WebLCT window will shut down automatically.
 When the target object is the Main Card [MC-AV] in the Standby mode, the
WebLCT will not shut down. Skip Step 7.

7. When the iPASOLINK VR 4 restarts, launch the WebLCT and log in to the
iPASOLINK VR 4 again.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-100 CONTROL ITEMS

8. Verify the information displayed in the F/W Reset Control window.

Figure 4-161 F/W Reset Control window

 For the Main Card [MC-AV] in the Active mode, this step ends the procedure.

9. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

10. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-101

4.7.2.2 Reset CPU (ODU)

Procedure 4-31

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control, then expand
H/W_F/W Reset Control to select F/W Reset Control. The F/W Reset Control
window appears.

3. Click the target ODU No. link in the Item field.

Figure 4-162 F/W Reset Control Window

click

F/W Reset Control option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-102 CONTROL ITEMS

4. Confirm the information then click the OK button.

Figure 4-163 F/W Reset Control (ODU) Option Window

5. Warning message dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-164 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-165 Information Dialog Box

The CPU Reset (ODU) starts automatically.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-103

7. When the target ODU is prepared, verify the information displayed in the F/W
Reset Control window.

Figure 4-166 F/W Reset Control window.

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-104 CONTROL ITEMS

4.8 Offline Maintenance

4.8.1 DADE Adjustment


DADE adjustment is necessary when the I/F cable is to be replaced or MODEM is to
be added/replaced. (In the initial start-up, the offset memory can be used to minimize
the delay, but it may interrupt the traffic when the delay is substantial.)

NOTE: Operation of DADE Adjustment is available in the 1+1 System Configuration


only. However, in the 1+1 System Configuration, the following conditions disable
the DADE Adjustment:
 Either of two MODEMs is not mounted in the 1+1 System Configuration.
 While in an ODU Power Supply alarmed condition. However, in order to
minimize the delay, DADE Off can be controlled though in the ODU Power
Supply condition.

Procedure 4-32
1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control to select
Offline Maintenance Control. The Offline Maintenance Control window
appears.

3. Select the Control link in the DADE Adjust option field.


Figure 4-167 Offline Maintenance Control Window
click

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-105

4. Offline Maintenance Control option window appears. Select a status from the
DADE Adjust drop-down list, and then click the OK button.

Figure 4-168 Offline Maintenance Control Option Window

Table 4-20 DADE Adjust Control

Parameter Value Description

DADE Adjust DADE Operational system (RXSW selection) is fixed to run DADE.
The operational system is not changed to avoid any circuit
interruption.

Offset DADE After DADE adjustment, it offsets in a DADE memory so the


amount of delay may serve as the minimum. Due to the
memory offset, it may cause any circuit interruption.

DADE Off DADE does not adjust, but in order to minimize the amount of
delay, it is set as the very end of the memory.

5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-169 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-170 Information Dialog Box

The Offline Maintenance Control window updates the information.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-106 CONTROL ITEMS

7. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Figure 4-171 Offline Maintenance Control Window

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-107

4.8.2 RF Sub Band Selection

Sub Band Selection is required to change the corresponding Sub band of the ODU.
This selection can set up each ODU individually, the available suffix Sub Band that
can be set up are the alphabet "A through H, J through N, P, R, and X".

NOTES:
1. Before changing the Sub Band setting, it is required to set TX Mute to ON,
and also prevent any rewriting data in the ODU Flash ROM.
2. When any ODU which does not support a Sub Band change and change
from a higher-order Sub Band, if a change setup is carried out, an ODU
classification is judged and a Sub Band change setup is not performed.

Procedure 4-33
1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.
2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control to select
Offline Maintenance Control. The Offline Maintenance Control window
appears.
3. Select the Control link in the RF Sub Band Select option field.

Figure 4-172 Offline Maintenance Control Window


click

Offline Maintenance Control option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-108 CONTROL ITEMS

4. Select the value from the RF Sub Band Select drop-down list, and then click
the OK button.

Figure 4-173 Offline Maintenance Control Box

Table 4-21 RF Sub Band Selection

Parameter Value Description

RF Sub Band Select A – H, Select an alphabet character that identifies the


J – N, setting Sub Band.
P, R, X

5. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-174 Warning Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-175 Information Dialog Box

Offline Maintenance Control window updates the information.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-109

7. Confirm the displayed parameters.

Figure 4-176 Offline Maintenance Control Window

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-110 CONTROL ITEMS

4.8.3 Adjust X-DEM Delay

If the length of the connection cables between ODU and IDU of Master side and that
of Slave side differs 8 m differences or longer, following adjustment is required:

Procedure 4-34

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control to select
Offline Maintenance Control. The Offline Maintenance Control window
appears.

3. Click the link in the X-DEM Delay Adjust option field.

Figure 4-177 Offline Maintenance Control Window

click

Offline Maintenance Control option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-111

4. Select the appropriate range according to the actual difference in length


between Master side cable and Slave side cable connecting IDU and ODU.

Figure 4-178 Offline Maintenance Control Option Window

Table 4-22 X-DEM Delay Adjustment Parameter

Parameter Value Description

X-DEM Delay Adjust –31 to –24 [m] Cable of Slave side is 31 to 24 m shorter than
that of Master side.

–24 to –16 [m] Cable of Slave side is 24 to 16 m shorter than


that of Master side.

–16 to –8 [m] Cable of Slave side is 16 to 8 m shorter than that


of Master side.

–8 to +8 [m] Difference in the cable length between Slave


side and Master Side is within –8 m to +8 m.

+8 to +16 [m] Cable of Slave side is 8 to 16 m longer than that


of Master side.

+16 to +24 [m] Cable of Slave side is 16 to 24 m longer than


that of Master side.

+24 to + 32 [m] Cable of Slave side is 24 to 32 m longer than


that of Master side.

e.g., When the cable of Master-side is 10m, and that of Slave-side is 1m, the
Slave-side cable is 9m shorter (–9m), where the option to select should be –
16 to –8 [m].

5. Click the OK button. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-179 Warning Dialog Box

Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-112 CONTROL ITEMS

6. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-180 Information Dialog Box

7. Offline Maintenance Control window updates the information. Confirm the


displayed in the X-DEM Delay Adjust option field.

Figure 4-181 Offline Maintenance Control Window

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-113

4.8.4 Adjust Delay Equalizer

This function adjusts or corrects the delay characteristics of branch in the


configuration using branch.

Procedure 4-35

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Control to select
Offline Maintenance Control. The Offline Maintenance Control window
appears.

3. Click the link in the Delay Equalizer option field.

Figure 4-182 Offline Maintenance Control Window

click

Offline Maintenance Control option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-114 CONTROL ITEMS

4. Select Enable or Disable by clicking the radio button. When selecting


Enable, set the remaining values as well:

Figure 4-183 Offline Maintenance Control Option Window

Table 4-23 Delay Equalizer Parameters

Parameter Value Description

Delay Equalizer Enable Enables the Delay Equalizer function. Selecting this
option enables the remaining parameters to adjust the
delay characteristics.
This option can be specified for the following types of
MODEM Card:
 MODEM-EA, FPGA Version 7.02 or later
 MODEM-AV (any FPGA Versions)

Disable Disables the Delay Equalizer. [default]

Linear Equalizer –9 to 9 Values to adjust the linear group delay. [default: 0]

Parabolic Equalizer 0 to 6 Values to adjust the parabolic group delay. [default: 0]

5. Click the OK button. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-184 Warning Dialog Box

Information dialog box appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-115

6. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-185 Information Dialog Box

7. Offline Maintenance Control window updates the information. Confirm it


displayed in the Delay Equalizer option field.

Figure 4-186 Offline Maintenance Control Window

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-116 CONTROL ITEMS

4.9 PTP Domain Control

4.9.1 Unlock the Mode

Operate this Procedure 4-36 if the equipment is in the Lockout mode. Otherwise,
skip this procedure, and go to Procedure 4-37 provided in 4.9.2 Switch Domain
Masters.

Procedure 4-36

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control to select PTP
Domain Control. The PTP Domain Control window appears.

4. If the target facility is locked (Lock Out indicates On), click the link. If it is not
locked (Lock Out indicates Off), go to 4.9.2 Switch Domain Masters

Figure 4-187 PTP Domain Control Window (on the Rightmost)

click

PTP Lock Out options window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-117

5. Click the Off radio button, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-188 PTP Lock Out Options Window

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button of the dialog box to
proceed.

Figure 4-189 Information Dialog Box

7. The PTP Domain Control window updates the information. Verify that the Lock
Out status of the target object indicates Off now.

Figure 4-190 PTP Domain Control Window (1/2: on the left)

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-118 CONTROL ITEMS

Figure 4-191 PTP Domain Control Window (2/2: to the rightmost)

8. Operate one of the following:


 To end the procedure:

i) Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the


window.

ii) Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white. This step ends the
procedure.
 To set the PTP Switching Control, go to Procedure 4-37 in 4.9.2 Switch
Domain Masters, Step 3.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-119

4.9.2 Switch Domain Masters

Procedure 4-37

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance button on the top of the WebLCT window to switch the
state to the maintenance mode. See 4.2.2 Change to Maintenance Mode (for
WebLCT Operation) for operating steps.

3. In the MENU frame on the left, expand Maintenance Control to select PTP
Domain Control. The PTP Domain Control window appears.

4. Click a link in the PTP SW Control fields:

NOTE: The target object must NOT be in the Lockout mode.

Figure 4-192 PTP Domain Control Window (to the rightmost)

click

5. PTP Switch Control options window appears. Select a switching mode


(Normal or Forced SW), then click the OK button.

Figure 4-193 PTP Switch Control Options Window

Information dialog box appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-120 CONTROL ITEMS

6. Click the OK button of the dialog box to proceed.


Figure 4-194 Information Dialog Box

7. The PTP Domain Control window updates the information. Verify that the
selected switch control is indicated for the target object.
Figure 4-195 PTP Domain Control Window (1/2: on the left)

Figure 4-196 PTP Domain Control Window (2/2: to the rightmost)

8. Exit the Maintenance Mode by clicking the Maintenance button on the


window.
9. Check that the MAINT indication turns from orange to white.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-121

4.10 Maintenance Test

4.10.1 ETH OAM

Perform this procedure to measure the link quality of Ethernet traffic. Note that these
functions should be used to check the quality or to measure or locate the rate of
packet loss or delay during the equipment is in the normal conditions. Prior to
proceeding with the Maintenance Test, following should be considered:

NOTES: When performing this Maintenance Test for ETH OAM DM/LM, proceed
with the followings (1 and 2) prior to starting the test.
1. Verify the connectivity in both directions between the equipment to carry out
this Maintenance Test and the target equipment to measure Delay/Loss
using the ETH-CC frames. The measurements under the failed condition do
not guarantee the results.
2. Execute the Loss Measurement and Delay Measurement with the
Transmission Count value 1 at the equipment to measure Delay/Loss
against the equipment to carry out this Maintenance Test.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-122 CONTROL ITEMS

Procedure 4-38

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Test to select ETH
OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control. The ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control window
appears.

3. Click the Modify Test Type tool button, or select the desired Test No.

Figure 4-197 ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control Window

Test No. Modify Test Type button

ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-123

4. Assign a proper value for each parameter, then click the OK button:
 Clicking the Modify Detail Test Parameter tool button opens its detailed
option window. Provided detailed parameters are:
 Transmission Count
 Transmission Period
 PDU Size
 Priority.

Figure 4-198 ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control Option Window

click

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-124 CONTROL ITEMS

Table 4-24 ETH OAM Maintenance Test Options

Parameter Value Description

ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control

Type LB Executes LB (Loopback) mode as Ethernet traffic test


type.

LT Executes LT (Link Tracer) mode as Ethernet traffic test


type.

DM Executes DM (Delay Measurement) mode as Ethernet


traffic test type.

LM Executes LM (Loss Measurement) mode as Ethernet


traffic test type.

MEP Index 1 to 128 When started from Modify tool button, enter the MEP
Index number. When started from selecting the item
number, this filed indicates the selected number.

Destination MAC Address or xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx Enter the MAC Address.


Target MAC Address
Multicast Tick a box to select the Multicast address. LT Mode
does not have this choice.

Modify Detail Test Parameter (for LB, DM or LM Mode)

MEP Index (read only) Indicates the selected item’s information.

Destination MAC Address (read only)

Transmission Count 1 to 127 Specifies the transmission count for the test.

Transmission Period 1 to 10 Specifies the transmission period for the test. Must be
the positive integer. [unit: second]

PDU Size 64 to 9600 Specifies the PDU size for the test. This option is for
LB mode only.

Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the priority.

Modify Detail Test Parameter (for LT Mode)

MEP Index (read only) Indicates the selected item’s information.

Target MAC Address (read only)

Transmission Count 1 to 127 Specifies the transmission count for the test.

TTL 1 to 255 Enter the Time to Live value.

Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the priority.

During the process, a progress bar appears.

The Result window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-125

5. Confirm the displayed parameters:

Figure 4-199 ETH OAM Test Result Window (Example: LB Result)

6. To save the History Information or Test Result in the local PC, operate the
following:

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-126 CONTROL ITEMS

 History Information
To save the History Information, click the Export CSV File tool button on the tool bar
of the ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control window.

Figure 4-200 ETH OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control Window

Export CSV File button

 Test Result
To save the test result, click the Export CSV File tool button on each result window.
Figure 4-201 Test Result Window (example: LT Result Window)

Export CSV File button

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-127

7. File Download option window appears. Click the Save button.


Figure 4-202 File Download Option Window

8. Save As option window appears. Select the proper folder of local PC and
then click the Save button.
 Default file name:
History Information: HistoryInformationExport _YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv
 Test Result: ss
TestResultExport-LB(or LT)_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv

Figure 4-203 Save As Option Window

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-128 CONTROL ITEMS

9. When completed, Download Complete window appears. Click the Close


button.

Figure 4-204 Download Complete Window

10. Confirm that the CSV file is saved in the selected folder.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-129

4.10.2 MPLS-TP OAM

Perform this procedure to measure the link quality of MPLS-TP traffic. Note that
these functions should be used to check the quality or to measure or locate the rate of
packet loss or delay during the equipment is in the normal conditions. Prior to
proceeding with the Maintenance Test, following should be considered:

NOTES: When performing this Maintenance Test for MPLS-TP OAM DM/LM,
proceed with the followings (1 and 2) prior to starting the test:
1. Verify the connectivity in both directions between the equipment to carry out
the test and the target equipment to measure Delay/Loss using the CC
frames. The measurements under the failed condition do not guarantee the
results.
2. Execute the Loss Measurement and Delay Measurement with the
Transmission Count value 1 at the equipment to measure Delay/Loss
against the equipment to carry out the test.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-130 CONTROL ITEMS

Procedure 4-39

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Maintenance Test to select MPLS-
TP OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control. The MPLS-TP OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control
window appears.

3. Click the Modify Test Type tool button, or select the desired Test No.

Figure 4-205 MPLS-TP OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control Window

Test No. Modify Test Type button

MPLS-TP OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-131

4. Assign a proper value for each parameter, then click the OK button:
 Clicking the Modify Detail Test Parameter tool button opens its detailed
option window. Provided detailed parameters are:
 Transmission Count
 Transmission Period
 Frame Size
 Priority.

Figure 4-206 MPLS-TP OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control Option Window

click

During the process, a progress bar appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-132 CONTROL ITEMS

Table 4-25 MPLS-TP OAM Maintenance Test Options (1/2)

Parameter Value Description

MPLS-TP OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control

Type LB Executes LB (Loopback) mode as MPLS-TP traffic test


type.

LT Executes LT (Link Tracer) mode as MPLS-TP traffic test


type. Destination is fixed to MEP.

DM Executes DM (Delay Measurement) mode as MPLS-TP


traffic test type. Destination is fixed to MEP.

LM Executes LM (Loss Measurement) mode as MPLS-TP


traffic test type. Destination is fixed to MEP.

MEP Index 1 to 128 When started from Modify tool button, enter the MEP
Index number. When started from selecting the item
number, this filed indicates the selected number.

Destination Type MEP Select MEP for MPLS-TP OAM test destination. When
the test type is LT, DM, or LM, this option is the only
choice (fixed).

MIP Select MIP for MPLS-TP OAM test destination. This


option is available when the test type is LB only.
Destination MEP ID 1 to 8191 Specifies MEP at the destination by its ID. For the test
type LB only.

Destination MIP ICC (text field) Enter the ITU-T Carrier Code. The valid value is
alphanumeric, one to six characters long, using 0 to 9 and
A to Z.

Destination Node ID 0 to 4294967295 Specify the Node at the destination by its ID.

Destination TTL 0to 255 Enter a Time to Live value. This option is available for the
test type LB selecting MIP, and the test type LT only.
For the test type LB selecting MIP, the value should be
determined so as to cause TTL Expire (TTL = 0) at the
destination.
For the test type DM and LM, this parameter’s value is
fixed to 255 that cannot be modified.

Modify Detail Test Parameter (for LB, DM or LM Mode)

MEP Index (read only) Indicates the selected item’s information.

Destination (read only)

Transmission Count 1 to 127 Specifies the transmission count for the test (for the test
type LB).

1 to 500 Specifies the transmission count for the test (for the test
types DM and LM).

Transmission Period 1 to 10 Specifies the transmission period for the test. Must be the
positive integer. [unit: second]

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-133

Table 4-25 MPLS-TP OAM Maintenance Test Options (2/2)

Parameter Value Description

Frame Size 71 to 9600 Specifies the frame size for the test. This option is for LB
mode only.

Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the priority.

Modify Detail Test Parameter (for LT Mode)

MEP Index (read only) Indicates the selected item’s information.

Destination (read only)

Priority 0 to 7 Specifies the priority.

5. The Result window appears. The Result window appears. Confirm the
displayed parameters:

Figure 4-207 Result Window Example: MPLS-TP OAM LB Result)

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-134 CONTROL ITEMS

6. To save the History Information or Test Result in the local PC, operate the
following:

 History Information
To save the History Information, click the Export CSV File tool button on the tool bar
of the MPLS-TP OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control window.

Figure 4-208 MPLS-TP OAM LB/LT/DM/LM Control Window

Export CSV File button

 Test Result
To save the test result, click the Export CSV File tool button on each result window.
Figure 4-209 Test Result Window (Example: MPLS-TP OAM LB Result)

Export CSV File button

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-135

7. File Download option window appears. Click the Save button.


Figure 4-210 File Download Option Window

8. Save As option window appears. Select the proper folder of local PC and
then click the Save button.
 Default file name:
History Information: HistoryInformationExport _YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv
 Test Result:
TestResultExport-LB(or LT)_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv

Figure 4-211 Save As Option Window

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-136 CONTROL ITEMS

9. When completed, Download Complete window appears. Click the Close


button.

Figure 4-212 Download Complete Window

10. Confirm that the CSV file is saved in the selected folder.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-137

4.11 Equipment Utility


Following lists the functions to Upload/Download Data:

 Export (NE ➞ Storage) Utility


This function downloads the Equipment Config Data, Network Config Data, User
Config Data, and Inventory Data from an NE to a local storage, such as local PC or
USB memory, etc.

 Update (Storage ➞ NE) Utility


This function uploads the Program File, FPGA Data, and Config Data from the local
storage (local PC or USB memory) to the NE. The downloaded data will be listed
under Uncurrent column of Program ROM Switching option window.

 Program ROM Switching


This function switches (swaps) the F/W currently running and that of downloaded
version (listed under Uncurrent), which is available for both IDU and ODU.

 USB Memory Utility


This function verifies the USB memory.

 Shipment
This function clears the user defined Provisioning data, which restores the factory
default (except for the Network Configurations if registered).

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-138 CONTROL ITEMS

4.11.1 Backup Database [Export (NE ➞ Storage) Utility]

Procedure 4-40

1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select Export
(NE->Storage) Utility. The Export (NE->Storage) Utility window appears.

2. Select the Config Data and a storage tool (Local PC or USB Memory) by
clicking their radio buttons, then click the Execute tool button.

Figure 4-213 Export (NE->Storage) Utility Window


Execute button

select data to export

select storage tool

3. Following inquiry message appears. Click the Save button.

Figure 4-214 Inquiry Message

Save As window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-139

4. Select/Specify a directory to save the data, and click the Save button.

Figure 4-215 Save As Window

Table 4-26 Configuration Data to Upload

Data Default File Name File Type

Equipment Configuration Data iPASOLINK- equip.cfg HTML Document

Network Configuration Data iPASOLINK- network.cfg Unknown File Type

User Configuration Data iPASOLINK- user.cfg Unknown File Type

Inventory Data Invent_VR_xxxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx.csv HTML Document

5. When data saving process is completed, following message to inform that the
download has completed. Click the View folder button.

Figure 4-216 Message to Inform the State

The folder to which the downloaded file is stored opens.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-140 CONTROL ITEMS

6. Verify that the data has been successfully saved.

Figure 4-217 Folder to Store Downloaded File (Example)

This step the ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-141

4.11.2 Update Database [Update (Storage➞ NE) Utility]

This function uploads the iPASOLINK VR 4 software, firmware (Program File


(*.bin)/FPGA), and equipment configuration files (*.cnf) from the local storage
(local PC or USB memory NOTE) to NE.

NOTE: Connect USB memory to the USB port at the iPASOLINK VR 4 front when the
data is stored on the USB.

Following lists the operations that are available using Update (Storage -> NE)
Utility:

 Program File Download


This function downloads the F/W from the local PC or USB memory to the targets.
(Main Card, ODU)

 FPGA Data File Download


This function downloads FPGA from the local PC or USB memory to the target
cards.

 Configuration Data File Download


This function downloads the configuration file (Equipment, Network, User) from the
local PC or USB memory to iPASOLINK VR 4.

 MODEM Parameter File Download


This function updates the MODEM parameter file on the MODEM module.

 SSL Server Certificate File Download

4.11.2.1 Upload Program File — Main Card (IDU)


Important:
1. Ensure that the prepared IDU Main Card Program File was supplied by
NEC.
2. Check the current version of IDU Main Card Program using the Equipment
Inventory Information [IDU tab].
3. Put the system into the Maintenance Mode before beginning to download
the IDU Main Card Program. Do not cancel the Maintenance Mode while the
download is in progress.
 Proceeding through the following terminates the WebLCT and restarts
iPASOLINK VR 4.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-142 CONTROL ITEMS

Procedure 4-41 Main Card

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select Update
(Storage -> NE) Utility. The Update (Storage -> NE) Utility window appears.

3. Select the Program File radio button and then click the Execute tool button.

Figure 4-218 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility Window

Execute button

Program File

4. Program File option window to select an object appears. Select the Main Card1
or 2 from drop-down list and then click Next button.

Figure 4-219 Program File Option Window

Program File window for selecting the destination appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-143

5. In the Import File option box, select the media (Local PC or USB Memory)
from which the file is transferred, and then click the folder icon button ( )
of the selected storage.

Figure 4-220 Program File Option Window for Main Card


select storage click a folder icon

6. An option window for Choosing File appears. Select the firmware for Main
Card (see below for the file name), and then click the Open (or OK) button.
 Main Card firmware name: evoh- idufw-vx.xx.xx.bin

 Option Window for Local PC

Figure 4-221 Choose File to Upload Option Window

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-144 CONTROL ITEMS

 Option Window for USB Memory

Figure 4-222 Update Utility Option Window

7. The Program File option window displays the selected directory. Click the OK
button.

Figure 4-223 Source Selection Option Window

8. Warning message dialog box appears Click the OK button.

Figure 4-224 Warning Dialog Box

The download progress bar appears.

Figure 4-225 Download Progress Bar

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-145

9. When the download process is completed, the Update Complete! message


dialog box appears. Check (leave a tick in) the Program ROM Switching
check box, and then click the OK button.

Figure 4-226 Update Complete! Dialog Box

Warning message dialog box appears.

10. Click the OK button to proceed. iPASOLINK VR 4 will be restarted


automatically.

Figure 4-227 Warning Message Dialog Box

11. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button. The WebLCT will shut
down to restart automatically.

Figure 4-228 Information Box

12. When the iPASOLINK VR 4 is restarted and prepared, log in to iPASOLINK


VR 4 again.

13. Select Inventory  Equipment Inventory Information from the WebLCT


menu.

The Equipment Inventory Information (IDU) window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-146 CONTROL ITEMS

14. Verify the Current version (version of newly running program) of Main Card.

Figure 4-229 Equipment Inventory Information Window

15. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-147

4.11.2.2 Upload Program File — ODU


Important:
1. Ensure that the prepared ODU Program File was supplied by NEC.
2. Check the current version of ODU Program using the Equipment Inventory
Information window [ODU tab].
3. Put the system into the Maintenance Mode before beginning to download
the ODU Program. Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while the
download is in progress.

Procedure 4-42 ODU

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select Update
(Storage -> NE) Utility. The Update (Storage -> NE) Utility window appears.

3. Select Program File by clicking its radio button, then click the Execute tool
button.

Figure 4-230 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility Window

Execute button

Program File

Program File option window to select an object appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-148 CONTROL ITEMS

4. Select the object type (ODU) from drop-down list, and then click the Next
button.
Figure 4-231 Program File Option Window

5. Program File >> ODU option window appears. Select the target ODU (No. #)
from ODU drop-down list, and then click Next button.
Figure 4-232 Program File >> ODU Option Window

6. The Program File option window for selecting a source. In the Import File
option box, select the media (Local PC or USB Memory) from which the file is
transferred, and then click the folder icon button ( ).

Figure 4-233 Program File Option Window


Import File option box folder icon

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-149

7. An option window to choose a file appears. Select the ODU firmware file (see
below for the file name), and click the Open (or OK) button.

 Option Window for Local PC

Figure 4-234 Choose File to Upload Option Window

 Option Window for USB Memory

Figure 4-235 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility Option Window

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-150 CONTROL ITEMS

8. The Program File option window displays the selected directory. Click the OK
button.
Figure 4-236 Program File Option Window

9. Warning message dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-237 Warning Dialog Box

File downloading starts. During the downloading process, the progress bar
shows up.

10. When completed, the Update Complete! message dialog box appears. Check
(leave a tick in) the Program ROM Switching check box, and then click the OK
button.
Figure 4-238 Update Complete! Dialog Box

11. Warning message dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-239 Warning Message Dialog Box

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-151

12. The Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button. The WebLCT will
shut down to restart automatically.

Figure 4-240 Information Box

13. When the iPASOLINK VR 4 is restarted and prepared, log in to iPASOLINK


VR 4 again.

14. Select Inventory  Equipment Inventory Information from the WebLCT


menu.

15. The Equipment Inventory Information (ODU) window appears. Verify the
current version (version of newly running program) of ODU.

Figure 4-241 Equipment Inventory Information Window

16. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

17. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-152 CONTROL ITEMS

4.11.2.3 Update FPGA Data


 Proceeding through the following for the Main Card [MC-AV] in the Active
mode terminates the WebLCT and restarts iPASOLINK VR 4.
 Where the Main Card [MC-AV] is duplicated having a Standby Card, proceeding
through the following causes switching between Active Card and Standby Card.

Important:

1. Ensure that the data file of FPGA from NEC has already been on the site.

2. Check the F/W versions using the Equipment Inventory Information window
[IDU tab].

3. To operate the FPGA data download, the system must be set into the
Maintenance mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while the
download process is in progress.

Procedure 4-43

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select Update
(Storage -> NE) Utility. The Update (Storage -> NE) Utility window appears.

3. Select FPGA Data by clicking its radio button, and then click the Execute tool
button.

Figure 4-242 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility Window

Execute button FPGA Data

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-153

4. FPGA Data option window appears. Select a target Card and FPGA from the
drop-down lists, then click the Next button.
NOTE: Drop-down list shows the registered Cards only.

Figure 4-243 FPGA Data Window (example: selecting MODEM)

5. The FPGA Data option window for selecting a source appears. In the Import File
option box, select the media (Local PC or USB Memory) from which the file is
transferred, and then click the folder icon button ( ).

Figure 4-244 FPGA Data Option Window

Import File option box


folder icon

An option window for selecting a file appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-154 CONTROL ITEMS

6. Select the FPGA Data file (see below for the file name), and click the Open
(or OK) button.

 Option Window for Local PC

Figure 4-245 Choose File to Upload Option Window

 Option Window for USB Memory

Figure 4-246 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility Option Window

The Program File option window displays the selected directory.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-155

7. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-247 FPGA Data Option Window

8. Warning message dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-248 Warning Dialog Box

File downloading starts. During the downloading process, the progress bar
shows up.

9. When completed, the Update Complete! message dialog box appears. Click
the OK button to execute the auto-revert process.

Figure 4-249 Update Complete! Dialog Box

10. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-156 CONTROL ITEMS

Figure 4-250 Information Dialog Box

 When the target object is MC-AV in Active mode, WebLCT shuts down, and the
iPASOLINK VR 4 restarts:

i) Launch the WebLCT, and log in to the iPASOLINK VR 4 again.

ii) Select the Inventory  Equipment Inventory Information from the WebLCT
menu.

11. In the Equipment Inventory Information window, click the IDU tab, and verify
the information of newly running program.

Figure 4-251 Equipment Inventory Information Window

(scroll)

12. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-157

 When the target object is MC-AV, the Maintenance mode has been already
released. This step ends the procedure.

13. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.
This step ends the procedure.

4.11.2.4 Update Configuration Data

 Proceeding through the following for the Main Card [MC-AV] in the Active
mode terminates the WebLCT and restarts iPASOLINK VR 4.

NOTES:

1. Do not store the data to be downloaded and the existing Configuration Data
File in the same folder. Keep the data separate so that the data can be
compared.

2. To download the Configuration Data, the system must be set into the
Maintenance mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while the
process is in progress.

3. Any Configuration Data obtained from a name-assigned NE has the file


name beginning with the NE name. See the table below (******** denotes the
NE name). Configuration Data that has an NE name in its file name can be
used to updated only the NE whose NE name is indicated by the file name.

Table 4-27 Configuration Data File Names (1)

Data File Type Data File Name of Name-Assigned NE

Equipment Configuration Data ********-vr4-equip.cfg

Network Configuration Data ********-vr4-network.cfg

User Configuration Data ********-vr4-user.cfg

When the specific NE’s Configuration Data is required to update other NE,
edit the file name by replacing the NE names.

For an NE that does not have its NE name, remove an NE name part from
the file name to use the data file. See the table below.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-158 CONTROL ITEMS

Table 4-28 Configuration Data File Names (2)

Data File Type Data File Name of Name-Assigned NE

Equipment Configuration Data vr4-equip.cfg

Network Configuration Data vr4-network.cfg

User Configuration Data vr4-user.cfg

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-159

Procedure 4-44

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select Update
(Storage -> NE) Utility. The Update (Storage -> NE) Utility window appears.

3. Select the Config Data by clicking its radio button, then click the Execute tool
button.

Figure 4-252 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility Window

Execute tool button


Config Data

The Config Data window for selecting source appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-160 CONTROL ITEMS

4. Select the data type (Network Config, Equipment Config, User Config) from
the Select Config Data Type drop-down list.

Figure 4-253 Config Data Option Window

Import File option box folder icon

5. In the Import File option box, select the media (Local PC or USB Memory)
from which the file is transferred, and then click the folder icon button ( ).
An option window for selecting a file appears.

6. Select the Config Data file.

 Option Window for Local PC

Figure 4-254 Choose File to Upload Option Window

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-161

 Option Window for USB Memory

Figure 4-255 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility Option Window

7. Click the Open (or OK) button.The Config Data option window displays the
selected directory.
8. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-256 Config Data Option Window

9. Warning message dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-257 Warning Message Dialog Box

File downloading starts. During the downloading process, the progress bar
shows up.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-162 CONTROL ITEMS

10. When completed, the Update Complete! dialog box appears. Click the OK
button to execute the auto-revert.

Figure 4-258 Update Complete! Window

11. Information dialog box appears. Click OK button. The WebLCT will shut down
automatically.

Figure 4-259 Information Dialog Box

12. When the iPASOLINK VR 4 restarts, log in to the iPASOLINK VR 4 again.

13. Upload the Configuration Data File again, then acquire the Configuration
Data.

14. Check the Configuration Data by comparing the latest Configuration Data
with the previous data.

15. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

4.11.2.5 Update MODEM Parameter Data

Important:
1. Ensure that the Parameter File to update MODEM that was from NEC has
already been on the site.
2. Check that the prepared Parameter File is for MODEM.
3. To operate the MODEM Parameter download, the system must be set into
the Maintenance mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while the
download process is in progress.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-163

Procedure 4-45

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select Update
(Storage -> NE) Utility. The Update (Storage -> NE) Utility window appears.

3. Select MODEM Parameter by clicking its radio button, and then click the
Execute tool button.

Figure 4-260 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility Window


Execute button MODEM Parameter

4. MODEM Parameter option window appears. Select a target MODEM, and


then click the OK button.

Figure 4-261 MODEM Parameter Option Window

The MODEM Parameter option window for selecting source appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-164 CONTROL ITEMS

5. In the Import File option box, select the media (Local PC or USB Memory)
from which the file is transferred, and then click the folder icon button ( ).

Figure 4-262 MODEM Parameter Option Window

6. An option window for selecting a file appears. Select the MODEM Parameter
file (see below for the file name), and then click the Open (or OK) button.
 MODEM Parameter file name: MDxxxxxx.mdp

 Option Window for Local PC

Figure 4-263 Choose File to Upload Option Window

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-165

 Option Window for USB Memory

Figure 4-264 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility

7. The MODEM Parameter option window displays the specified information. Click
the OK button.

Figure 4-265 MODEM Parameter Option Window

8. Warning message dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-266 Warning Dialog Box

File downloading starts. During the downloading process, the progress bar
shows up.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-166 CONTROL ITEMS

9. When completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to


proceed.

Figure 4-267 Information Dialog Box

10. Launch and log in to the WebLCT.

11. From the WebLCT menu, select the Inventory  Equipment Inventory
Information from the WebLCT menu. The Equipment Inventory Information
window appears.

12. Check the latest MODEM Parameter Data running by comparing the
confirmed parameter of specified MODEM.

Figure 4-268 Equipment Inventory Information Window

(scroll)

13. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

14. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white. This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-167

4.11.2.6 Update SSL Server Certificate

Procedure 4-46

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select Update
(Storage -> NE) Utility. The Update (Storage -> NE) Utility window appears.

3. Select SSL Server Certificate by clicking its radio button, and then click the
Execute tool button.

Figure 4-269 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility Window


Execute button SSL Server Certificate

4. SSL Server Certificate option window appears. In the Import File option box,
select the media (Local PC or USB Memory) from which the file is transferred,
then click the folder tool button ( ) to locate the certificate file.

Figure 4-270 SSL Server Certificate Option Window

Import File option box folder icon

Choose File to Upload option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-168 CONTROL ITEMS

5. Select the file, and click the Open button. The valid file is compressed by the
zip application.

 Option Window for Local PC

Figure 4-271 Choose File to Upload Option Window

 Option Window for USB Memory

Figure 4-272 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-169

6. SSL Server Certificate option window indicates the selected file. Click the OK
button to proceed.

Figure 4-273 SSL Server Certificate Option Window

OK button

7. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-274 Warning dialog Box

During the process, a progress bar shows up.

8. When the process is completed, following Information dialog box appears.


Click the OK button to proceed

Figure 4-275 Information Dialog Box

The system starts updating SSL Server Certificate file.


 WebLCT is automatically logged off from the equipment.
 It may take a few minutes to 10 minutes (depending on your PC’s capacity)
for updating process, during which the equipment does not allow another
logging in.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-170 CONTROL ITEMS

4.11.2.7 Update CLI Script

Procedure 4-47

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select Update
(Storage -> NE) Utility. The Update (Storage -> NE) Utility window appears.

3. Select CLI Script by clicking its radio button, and then click the Execute tool
button.

Figure 4-276 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility Window


Execute button SSL Server Certificate

4. SSL Server Certificate option window appears. In the Import File option box,
select the media (Local PC or USB Memory) from which the file is transferred,
then click the folder tool button ( ) to locate the certificate file.

Figure 4-277 CLI Script Option Window

Import File option box folder icon

Choose File to Upload option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-171

5. Select the file, and click the Open button.

 Option Window for Local PC

Figure 4-278 Choose File to Upload Option Window

 Option Window for USB Memory

Figure 4-279 Update (Storage -> NE) Utility

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-172 CONTROL ITEMS

6. SSL Server Certificate option window indicates the selected file. Click the OK
button to proceed.

Figure 4-280 SSL Server Certificate Option Window

OK button

7. Warning dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-281 Warning dialog Box

During the process, a progress bar shows up.

8. When the process is completed, following Information dialog box appears.


Click the OK button to proceed

Figure 4-282 Information Dialog Box

The system starts updating SSL Server Certificate file.


 WebLCT is automatically logged off from the equipment.
 It may take a few minutes to 10 minutes (depending on your PC’s capacity)
for updating process, during which the equipment does not allow another
logging in.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-173

4.11.3 Switch (Swap) Program ROM

4.11.3.1 Switch (Swap) Main Card ROM

 Proceeding through the following for the Main Card [MC-AV] in the Active side
terminates the WebLCT and restarts iPASOLINK VR 4.

Important:
To operate the Program ROM Switching, the system must be set into the
Maintenance mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while controlling
the switching operation.

Procedure 4-48

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select
Program ROM Switching. The Program ROM Switching window appears.

3. Click the Main Card1 or 2 link in the Item field.

Figure 4-283 Program ROM Switching Window


click Main Card 1 or Main Card 2

NOTE: Main Card2 appears for the selection when an MC-AV Card is registered to
MAIN 2 slot.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-174 CONTROL ITEMS

4. The Program ROM Switching (Main Card) option window appears. Confirm the
information, then click the OK button.

Figure 4-284 Program ROM Switching (Main Card) Window

5. Warning message dialog box appears. Click the OK button to execute the
auto-revert process.

Figure 4-285 Warning Message Dialog Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button. The WebLCT will shut
down automatically.

Figure 4-286 Information Box

 When the target MC-AV is in the standby mode, the WebLCT will not shut down
or iPASOLINK VR 4 will not restart either. Skip the next Step 7.

7. When the iPASOLINK VR 4 restarts, launch the WebLCT and log in to the
iPASOLINK VR 4 again.
8. Select the Equipment Utility  Program ROM Switching from the WebLCT
menu. The Program ROM Switching window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-175

9. Verify the current version of the Main Card:

Figure 4-287 Program ROM Switching Window

10. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

11. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

4.11.3.2 Switch ODU Rom


Important:
To operate the Program ROM Switching, the system must be set into the
Maintenance mode; Do not cancel the Maintenance mode while controlling
the switching operation.

Procedure 4-49

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select
Program ROM Switching. The Program ROM Switching window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-176 CONTROL ITEMS

3. Click the target ODU No. link in the Item field.


Figure 4-288 Program ROM Switching Window
click ODU

4. The Program ROM Switching (ODU) option window appears. Confirm the
information then click OK button.
Figure 4-289 Program ROM Switching (ODU) Box

5. Warning message dialog box appears. Click the OK button to execute the
auto-revert process.

Figure 4-290 Warning Box

6. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

Figure 4-291 Information Box

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-177

7. The Program ROM Switching window updates the information. Verify the
current version of the target ODU.

Figure 4-292 Program ROM Switching Window

8. When confirmed, click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT tool bar to
exit from the Maintenance Mode.

9. Confirm that the MAINT indicator on the tool bar changes from orange to
white.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-178 CONTROL ITEMS

4.11.4 Check USB Memory Utility

Procedure 4-50

1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select USB
Memory Utility. The USB Memory Utility window appears.

2. Click the Refresh tool button on the WebLCT tool bar.

Figure 4-293 USB Memory Utility Window

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-179

4.11.5 Log Clear Function

Event Logs, PMON Logs, and RMON Logs that are no longer necessary can be
removed from the system storage.

Procedure 4-51

1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select Log
Clear Function. The Log Clear Function window appears.

2. Select the log type (Event Log or PMON/RMON Log) by clicking its radio
button.
Figure 4-294 USB Memory Utility Window

3. Confirmation dialog box appears. Click the OK button to proceed.


Figure 4-295 Confirmation Dialog Box

4. When completed, Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button to


proceed. This step ends the procedure.
Figure 4-296 Information Dialog Box

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-180 CONTROL ITEMS

4.11.6 Restore Factory Default Settings


 Proceeding through the following terminates the WebLCT and restarts
iPASOLINK VR 4.

Procedure 4-52

1. Click the Maintenance tool button on the tool bar of the WebLCT to put the
system into the Maintenance Mode. The MAINT indicator on the tool bar
changes to orange.

2. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Equipment Utility to select
Shipment. The Shipment window appears.

3. Click the Shipment tool button.

Figure 4-297 Shipment Window

Shipment tool button

The Shipment option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-181

4. Select the operation from the drop-down list, and click the OK button.

Figure 4-298 Shipment Option Window

Table 4-29 Shipment Parameter

Parameter Value Description

Shipment Type Provisioning Clear Restore the provisioning data only.

All Clear w/o Software Key Restore all the data except Software Key.

5. Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button. iPASOLINK VR 4 will


restart automatically.

Figure 4-299 Information Dialog Box

6. Another Information dialog box appears. Click the OK button. The WebLCT will
shut down automatically.

Figure 4-300 Information Dialog Box

7. When the iPASOLINK VR 4 restarts, launch the WebLCT and log in to the
iPASOLINK VR 4 again.

8. Verify the parameters in Equipment Setup window.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-182 CONTROL ITEMS

Figure 4-301 Equipment Setup window

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-183

4.12 Inventory
The Inventory retrieves and displays the information of H/W (except CWDMF*),
mounted MODEM, Network information, and Software License Key information for
the iPASOLINK VR 4. (*: Inventory information of SFP modules on the Card that is
associated with the target CWDMF can be retrieved.)

4.12.1 Equipment Inventory Information

4.12.1.1 IDU Tab

Procedure 4-53

1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Inventory to select Equipment
Inventory Information. The Equipment Inventory Information window
appears.

2. Click on the IDU tab to display the IDU information, and confirm the displayed
information.

Figure 4-302 Equipment Inventory Information for IDU (1/2)

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-184 CONTROL ITEMS

Figure 4-303 Equipment Inventory Information for IDU (2/2)

Figure 4-304

Table 4-30 Equipment Inventory Information (IDU Tab)

Parameter Description
IDU/Card Code No. (NEC Identification Number), Name, Serial No., Manufactured date
and Hardware Version.
Firmware Information Name, Current Version and Uncurrent Version.
FPGA Information Code No. (NEC Identification Number), Name and Version.
Parameter Information Current Version
SFP/SFP+ Information Port (registered port), Type (Ethernet category), Wavelength (nm) and Color.
See Figure 4-304 and Table 4-31 also.
MAC Address Information Port and MAC Address.
M-Plane/U-Plane

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-185

Figure 4-304 SFP/SFP+ Detailed Information

Table 4-31 SFP/SFP+ Detailed Information

Parameter Description

SFP/SFP+ Detail Information Port (registered port), Vendor Name, Part No., Vendor Serial No., Revision,
and Manufactured Date.

3. To save the Inventory Information, click the Export IDU Inventory


Information tool button, if required.

Figure 4-305 Location of Export Tool Button

Export IDU Inventory Information tool button

4. The File Download option window appears. Click the Save button.

Figure 4-306 File Download Window

The Save As option window appears.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-186 CONTROL ITEMS

5. Select the proper folder of local PC and then click Save button.
 Default file name: IDU_Inventory_information_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv

Figure 4-307 Save As Option Window

6. When completed, Download Complete window appears. Click the Close


button.

Figure 4-308 Download Complete Window

7. Confirm that the Inventory Information file is saved in the selected folder.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-187

4.12.1.2 ODU Tab

Procedure 4-54

1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Inventory to select Equipment
Inventory Information. The Equipment Inventory Information window
appears.
2. Click on the ODU tab to display the ODU information, and confirm the
displayed information.

Figure 4-309 Equipment Inventory Information for ODU Tab

(leftmost filed)

(rightmost filed)

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-188 CONTROL ITEMS

Table 4-32 Equipment Inventory Information (ODU Tab)

Parameter Description

Unit Information

Code No. NEC document identification number.

Name Name of a Card.

Serial No. Serial number that is applied to the Card.

Manufactured Date The date when the Card was manufactured.

Hardware Version Version number of the Card.

Firmware Information

Current Version Current version number of the firmware.

Uncurrent Version Version number of the secondary firmware.

Frequency Information

TX Start Frequency [MHz] Indicates the status of the Frequency.

TX Stop Frequency [MHz] Refer to the Radio Configuration Setting.

RX Start Frequency [MHz]

RX Stop Frequency [MHz]

Frequency Step [MHz]

Shift Frequency [MHz]

Upper/Lower

TX Phase

RX Phase

SUB Band

3. To save the Inventory Information, click the Export ODU Inventory


Information tool button, if required.

Figure 4-310 Location of Export Tool Button

Export ODU Inventory Information tool button

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-189

4. File Download option window appears. Click the Save button.

Figure 4-311 File Download Option Window

5. Save As option window appears. Select the proper folder of local PC and
then click the Save button.
 Default file name: ODU_Inventory_information_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv

Figure 4-312 Save As Option Window

6. When completed, Download Complete window appears. Click the Close


button.

Figure 4-313 Download Complete Window

7. Confirm that the Inventory Information file is saved in the selected folder.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-190 CONTROL ITEMS

4.12.2 Software License Key Information

Following describes how to confirm and export the Software License Key of the
equipment.

Procedure 4-55

1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Inventory to select S/W License
Information. The S/W License Information window appears.

Figure 4-314 S/W License Information Window (1/2)

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-191

Figure 4-315 S/W License Information Window (2/2)

2. To save the Inventory Information, click the Export S/W License Information
tool button, if required.

Figure 4-316 Location of Export Button

Export S/W License Information tool button

3. File Download option window appears. Click the Save button.

Figure 4-317 File Download Option Window

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-192 CONTROL ITEMS

4. Save As option window appears. Select the proper folder, then click the Save
button.
 Default file name: License Information_*********_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv

Figure 4-318 Save As Window

5. When completed, Download Complete window appears. Click the Close


button.

Figure 4-319 Download Complete Window

6. Confirm that the License Information file is saved in the selected folder.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-193

4.12.3 User Description

Some hardware cannot store their registration information. User Description is an


option to store those objects’ information manually. Following describes how to
create memos onto WebLCT.

Characters to enter here are restricted. Following is the list of the available characters:

b6-b4 0 1 10 11 100 101 110 111

b3-b0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 Space
0 — — 0 @ P ‘ p
(NOTE 2)

1 1 — — ! 1 A Q a q

10 2 — — " 2 B R b r

11 3 — — # 3 C S c s

100 4 — — $ 4 D T d t

101 5 — — % 5 E U e u

110 6 — — & 6 F V f v

111 7 — — ’ 7 G W g w

1000 8 — — ( 8 H X h x

1001 9 — — ) 9 I Y i y

1010 A — — * : J Z j z

1011 B — — + ; K [ k {

1100 C — — , < L \ l |

1101 D — — - = M ] m }

1110 E — — . > N ^ n ~

1111 F — — / ? O _ o —

NOTES:

1. Characters in the cell cannot be entered.

2. Spaces can be used between other available characters only, not at the
head or tail end.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-194 CONTROL ITEMS

Procedure 4-56

1. In the MENU frame on the left, expand the Inventory to select User
Description. The User Description window appears.

2. Click a desired link, and enter the information.

Figure 4-320 User Description Window

click (see Figure 4-321)

click (see Figure 4-322)

click (see Figure 4-323)

click (see Figure 4-323)

click (see Figure 4-324)

(leftmost field)

(rightmost field)

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CONTROL ITEMS 4-195

Figure 4-321 User Description (Locality) Option Window

Figure 4-322 User Description (Remark) Option Window

Figure 4-323 User Description (Title) Option Window

Figure 4-324 User Description (No. #) Option Window

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
4-196/END CONTROL ITEMS

3. When completed, click the OK button. Clicking the OK button of each option
window displays the Information dialog box.

4. Click the OK button to proceed.

Figure 4-325 Information Dialog Box

5. The User Description window updates the information.

Figure 4-326 User Description Window

This page is intentionally left blank.

This step ends the procedure

GGS-000394-07E iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-1

5. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.1 Equipment Conditions

5.1.1 Reporting Methods


Equipment condition can be obtained by the WebLCT. The condition is also visibly
reported using indication lamps on the equipment. iPASOLINK defines the following
alarm status:

5.1.2 Alarm Status

 CL [Cleared]:
CL indicates that one or more previously reported alarms has/have been cleared. This
state applies to all alarms detected for this managed object with the same alarm type,
probable cause and specific problems (if given). Multiple associated notifications
may be cleared by using the Correlated notifications parameter (defined below).

 ID [Indeterminate]:
ID indicates that the detected condition cannot be determined to classify the severity
level.

 CR [Critical]:
CR indicates for the Critical Alarm that causes a service affecting failure, which
requires an immediate corrective action. If this level of condition is reported, the
managed object could totally go out of service, restoring its capability.

 MJ [Major]:
MJ indicates for the Major Alarm that causes a service affecting failure which
requires an urgent corrective action. If this level of condition is reported, the
capability of the managed object could be severely degraded, restoring its full
capability.

 MN [Minor]:
MN indicates for the Minor Alarm that detects the existence of a non-service affecting
condition, which requires the corrective action in order to prevent a more serious
(such as a service affecting) failure. This condition does not degrade the capacity of
the managed object.

 WR [Warning]:
WR indicates for the detection of a potential or impending service affecting fault,
before any significant effects have been felt. Action should be taken to further
diagnose (if necessary) and correct the problem in order to prevent a more serious
failure, such as a service affecting fault.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-2 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2 View Current Status

5.2.1 Overview

Current Status window of the WebLCT displays the equipment status, Line Card
status, event logs and alarms detected by the equipment. The window displays the
view-only information; not editable.

5.2.2 Display Current Status Window

Procedure 5-1

 From starting up the WebLCT:

1. Launch and log in to WebLCT. The initial (main) window of the WebLCT
displays the Current Status information.

 From other task window:

1. Click the Current Status on top of the MENU frame in the left. The main
window in the right shows the Current Status information.

The Current Status window provides the information on the following objects
separated by tabs on which their items are indicated:
 Active Alarm
 Event Log
 Modem/ODU
 IDU
 E1
 STM-1
 ETH
 MSE

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-3

5.2.2.1 Active Alarm Tab

The Active Alarm tabbed window displays the list of current alarms that have been
detected by the equipment.

 View Active Alarm

Procedure 5-1

1. Click the Refresh tool button to display the Active Alarms.

Figure 5-1 Current Status Window — Active Alarm Tab

Refresh tool button

The Active Alarm tabbed window displays all the current alarms that have been
detected by the equipment.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-4 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

2. Click the link in the Items field.

Figure 5-2 Active Alarm Tab (Updated)

click

3. Alarm Information window appears.

Figure 5-3 Alarm Information Window

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-5

 Save Active Alarms

The displayed information can be saved onto the storage area of WebLCT PC. To
save the information, click the Save button located within the Active Alarm list. See
5.2.3 Save the Displayed Information for an example.

Figure 5-4 Current Status Window — Active Alarm Tab

Save button

NOTE: To save the alarm list, refer to the procedure provided in 5.2.3 Save the
Displayed Information.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-6 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2.2.2 Event Log Tab

The Event Log tabbed window displays the information of all the detected alarms
and status, including any changes made to the Line Cards and the equipment
configuration.

The displayed information can be saved onto the storage area of WebLCT PC. To
save the information, click the Save button located within the Event Log list.

Figure 5-5 Current Status Window — Event Log Tab

Save button

NOTE: To save the log list, refer to the procedure provided in 5.2.3 Save the Displayed
Information.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-7

5.2.2.3 MODEM/ODU Tab and List of Conditions

The MODEM/ODU tabbed window displays the information of alarms and status
detected from MODEM Card(s), On-Board MODEM and from ODU.

Clicking the MODEM/ODU tab adds another row of related tabs.

Figure 5-6 Current Status Window — MODEM/ODU Tab

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-8 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Table 5-1 Status for MODEM/ODU Interface

Indication Description

ODU

Mute Status Indicates that the control status of the ODU TX Power Output is
set to MUTE.

TX SW Status Indicates the Radio Interface TX SW usage state in 1+1 HS


Redundant configuration.

MODEM

ATPC Power Mode Indicates that a failure of APTC control signal (for 90 seconds),
or a status of MAX Power (for 90 seconds) has been detected.

Cluster Alarm Out Indicates that the Cluster Alarm is enabled to output.

FDB Full FDB Full indication is specified per VLAN.

Inphase Indicates that the DADE status of the received signal between
No. 1 and No. 2 MODEM interfaces are in phase. When in this
condition, a hitless switching-over is available.

MODEM Power Supply Indicates if the power of MODEM-A/EA Card is on or off.

ODU Power Supply Set Status Indicates the status of ODU PWR IF1 or ODU PWR IF2 on On-
Board MODEM.

Online Status Indicates the online/offline status of MODEM-A/EA Cards


configuring the 1+1 Protection.

Radio Traffic Aggregation Indicates the number of occurrence of encapsulation packet error
Encapsulation Error at the incoming port of RTA Radio Group.

Radio Traffic Aggregation Port Status Indicates the status of RTA assigned port.

RX Modulation Indicates that the modulation system at the receiving side has
been changed.

RX SW Status Indicates the state of Radio interface RX SW usage in the


redundant configuration.

TX Modulation Indicates that the modulation system of MODEM at the


transmitting side has been changed.

TX SW Lock-in Status Indicates that TX SW is in the locked-in status.

TX SW Reverse Request Indicates the receiving condition of the TX SW Signal from the
opposite station.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-9

5.2.2.4 IDU Tab and List of Conditions

The IDU tabbed window displays the information of alarms and status detected from
IDU and Main Card [MC-AV Card]. For the status regarding the Ethernet (GbE) ports
on MC-AV Card, see 5.2.2.7 ETH Tab and List of Conditions also.

Figure 5-7 Current Status Window — IDU Tab

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-10 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Table 5-2 Status for IDU and MC-AV Main Card

Indication Description

FDB Full FDB Full indication is specified per VLAN.

Total FDB Full Dynamic Entry in L2Switch has reached the maximum number.

Main Card [MC-AV]

CLK Status Changed Indicates that a change has been made to Reference Clock.

CLK2M Mount Status Indicates the status of mounted CLK2 Module.

EXT CLK Mount Status Indicates the status of mounted EXTCLK Module.

EXT CLK Output Status Indicates the status of mounted EXTCLK Outputs.

EXT CLK Quality Level Indicates the quality level of EXTCLK Outputs.

Maintenance Indicates that the system is set into the Maintenance mode.

Running Status Indicates the running status.

SNCP Protection Status Indicates for Path Protection Switching status.

SNCP SW Path Protection Switching was carried out.

Squelch External CLK Output is in the squelch condition.

Switch Complete Switching process is completed.

Switch Over FAIL Failed in switching over.

Switched Reason Factor that made to switch the Main Cards.

Switched Time Date and time when switching of Main Card (ACT side) was
carried out.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-11

5.2.2.5 E1 Tab and List of Conditions


The E1 tabbed window displays the information of alarms and status of 16E1-A
Card. Clicking the E1 tab adds another row of related tabs.

Figure 5-8 Current Status Window — E1 Tab

Table 5-3 Status for E1 Interface (16E1-A Card)

Indication Description

E1 AIS PDH-AIS [Alarm/Status category can be changed by the AIS


Received Condition setting.

E1 AIS Generated Indicates for AIS generated on every E1 Channel.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-12 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2.2.6 STM-1 Tab and List of Conditions

The STM-1 tabbed window displays the information of alarms and status detected
from STM1-A Card. Clicking the STM-1 tab adds another row of related tabs.

Figure 5-9 Current Status Window — STM-1 Tab

Table 5-4 Status for STM-1 Interface (STM-1A Card)

Indication Description
ALS ALS has suspended optical outputs at indicated STM-1 optical port.
APS Lock-in Status Indicates that APS Protection is in the locked-in status.
APS Online Status Indicates the online status of APS Protection.
APS Protection Status Indicates APS Line Protection Status, such as FS, SF, SD, MS and
NR.
APS SW Notifies that a selection of APS Protection has been changed.
E1 AIS Generated Indicates for AIS generated on E1 Channel.
PJE Pointer Justification Event has been generated at STM Port.
RS UAS Status Indicates that UAS Status has been detected at STM-1 Port.
(Regenerator Section)
STM-1 AIS Generated Indicates for AIS generated on STM-1 optical port.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-13

5.2.2.7 ETH Tab and List of Conditions

The ETH tabbed window displays the information of alarms and status detected from
GbE ports that are provided on GbE-A Card and MC-AV Card. Clicking the ETH tab
adds another row of related tabs.

Figure 5-10 Current Status Window — ETH Tab

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-14 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Table 5-5 Status for Ethernet Interface

Indication Description

Flow Control Indicates Flow Control status of the indicated port.

LACP Status Indicates the current status of Link Aggregation Control Protocol.

LAG LLF Status Indicates a LINKDOWN caused by Link Loss Forwarding. The
Ethernet port that is set to the edge mode is having a
LINKDOWN state.

LAG Port Loop Detect Received LACP Frame has its own MAC Source Address for its
Source Address.

LAG Port Status Indicates the current status of LAG member ports; ACT (Active)
or SBY (Standby).

LLF Indicates the setting of Link Loss Forwarding.

LLF Message Timeout Loss of a conditional signaling in which the LLF control signal
should be received continuously from the opposite radio
equipment.

MDI/MDI-X Indicates MDI status of the indicated Ethernet port.

Remote Errored Frame Received a message that Errored Frame has been detected at
the opposing site.

Remote Errored Frame Period Received a message that Errored Frame Period has been
detected at the opposing site.

Remote Errored Frame Seconds Received a message that Errored Frame Seconds Summary has
Summary been detected at the opposing site.

Remote Errored Frame Symbol Period Received a message that Errored Symbol Period has been
detected at the opposing site.

SFP Port Type Indicates an SFP Port type, optic or electric.


Speed & Duplex Indicates a specified LAN Port Setting on speed rate and duplex
mode.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-15

5.2.2.8 MSE Tab and List of Conditions

The MSE tabbed window displays the information of alarms and status detected from
MSE-A Card. Clicking the MSE tab adds another row of related tabs.

Figure 5-11 Current Status Window — MSE Tab

Table 5-6 Status for MSE Card

Indication Description

Adaptive CLK Status Outputs in the adaptive clock state has changed.
[Acquired, Acquiring, Holdover]

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-16 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2.3 Save the Displayed Information

Procedure 5-2

1. Click the Save button.

Save tool button

2. File Download option window appears. Click the Save button:


Figure 5-12 Save File Option Window

Save As option window appears.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-17

3. Specify the directory to save the information, then click the Save button:
Figure 5-13 Save As Option Window

 A file name is specified by default using the name of information type and saving
date, e.g., an example above shows that the Active Alarm data is saved on
October 8th, 2010 at 12:59:34 pm. [ActiveAlarm_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv,
where YYYY indicates the year using four digits, MM indicates the month, DD
indicates the day, hh indicates the hour, mm indicates the minute, and ss
indicates the second.]

4. When the process is completed, the Download complete window appears.


Click the Close button of the window.

Figure 5-14 Download completed Window

5. Check the specified directory for the data if they are properly saved.

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-18 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.3 Alarm Lights


If an alarm is detected, its ALM LED on the IDU front indicates the condition as well.
A faulty part can be located by viewing the ALM LED indication(s) and the current
alarm status retrieved by the WebLCT. The alarm notification is also made to the user
by an Office Alarm, such as the Station Alarm bell and lamps.

ALM LED on the rack front lights up if an alarm is generated, and goes off when the
condition is cleared. Following show the locations of LEDs:

5.3.1 iPASOLINK VR 4 Controls and Indicators

Figure 5-15 iPASOLINK VR 4 IDU Front View

5.3.2 Fundamental Cards

5.3.2.1 MC-AV Card

Figure 5-16 MC-AV Card Controls and Indicators

5.3.2.2 FAN-CV Card

Figure 5-17 FAN-CV Card Indicator

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-19

5.3.3 Universal Slots

5.3.3.1 MODEM Card

Figure 5-18 MODEM-A/EA Card Control and Indicators

Figure 5-19 MODEM-AV Card Control and Indicators

5.3.3.2 16E1-A Card

Figure 5-20 16E1-A Card Indicator

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-20 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.3.3.3 STM1-A Card

Figure 5-21 STM1-A Card Indicator

5.3.3.4 GbE-A Card

Figure 5-22 GbE-A Card Indicators

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-21

5.4 Trouble Shooting Flow


5.4.1 Troubleshoot ODU TX Section
Figure 5-23 Flowchart for Troubleshooting ODU TX Section

START

Is
IDU LED (red) NO
of MC-AV (ACT) Card
on?
YES Connect WebLCT to see if
the Status for ODU indicates
Normal or not.
Is
ALM LED (red) NO
on MODEM Card
blinking? *: regarding specification,
Does length and cable loss.
NO
YES TX Input indicate
Normal?

Check I/F cable connections: YES


 Connected properly? Are I/F cables NO
 Has no short-circuit? standard* type?

Does NO YES
TX Power indicate
Normal? Replace ODU.

YES
Connect the standard
type I/F cables.

Turn MD/ODU PWR switch on


IDU off, and turn it on again.
Does
ODU CPU / Cable Open
indicate Normal?
NO
Reset ODU’s CPU. YES Does
TX Power vary NO
with ATPC manual
control?

Do ODU YES
NO
conditions indicate
Normal?
If Alarm of TX Power
YES is not removed by
Replace ODU. Check ODU’s improving temperature,
RX Section. replace ODU. Replace ODU.
END

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-22 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.4.2 Troubleshoot ODU RX Section


Figure 5-24 Flowchart for Troubleshooting RX Section

START

Is
IDU LED (red) NO
of MC-AV (ACT) Card
on?
YES
Connect WebLCT to see if
the Status for ODU indicates
Is Normal or not.
ALM LED (red) NO
on MODEM Card
blinking?

YES Does
RX Level indicate NO
Normal?
Check I/F cable connections:
 Connected properly? YES
 Has no short-circuit? Does NO
RX Level by RSL monitor
vary at random
interval?
YES

Check the fading


and/or the interfaces.

Does Are
NO frequency NO
ODU CPU / Cable Open values at local and
indicate Normal? opposite sites
correct?
YES
YES
Reset ODU’s CPU.

Has ODU’s NO
TX Section been already
Check antenna system
Do ODU checked? or replace ODU.
NO
status indicate
Normal? YES

YES

Check ODU’s Adjust the frequency to


Replace ODU. Replace ODU. TX Section. the appropriate value.

END

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-23

5.4.3 Troubleshoot IDU Section

Figure 5-25 Flowchart for Troubleshooting IDU Section (1/2)

START

Is
PWR LED (green) NO
of PS-M Card
on?
YES
Replace a fuse on IDU.

Is
NO
IDU LED (red) of
MC-AV Card
on?
YES

Connect WebLCT, and check the Current Status


to see if the IDU object indicates Normal or not.
Is if the IDU object indicates
ALM LED (red) of NO
MODEM Card
blinking?
YES
Does
AIS Generated NO
Check I/F cable connections: indicate Normal?

 Connected properly? YES


 Has no short-circuit?
Check associated DTE.

Do
other lines statuses NO
indicate Normal?

YES
Check associated DTE
at local site.

Does
Usage Error NO
indicate Normal?

YES
Set appropriate
channel usage.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-24 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Figure 5-26 Flowchart for Troubleshooting IDU Section (2/2)

Does
status of ODU NO
indicate Normal?

YES Check ODU Section.

Does NO
status of IDU
indicate Normal?

YES Does
Module of Main Card NO
indicate Normal?

YES
Replace IDU.
Execute IF Loopback. Does
NO
[Refer to 4.3.1 IF Loopback] Module of Option Card
indicate Normal?

YES
Replace Option Card.
Does NO
RDI indicate
Does
NO Normal?
Status of IDU indicate
Normal? YES
YES Check equipment
Check ODU Section. on opposite site.
Do
LOF, Frame ID,
High BER, Low BER and NO
Early Warning indicate
Normal?

YES Replace IDU.

Does
NO
input LOS indicate
Normal?

YES

Check associated DTE Check DTE and cable


and cable connections connections.
on opposite site.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-25

5.5 Replacing Procedures for Radio Portion


For procedures to replace outdoor equipment, refer to the Appendix, Outdoor
Equipment manual

5.6 Replacing Procedure for IDU


Following are procedures to dismount/mount IDU. For the technical assistance or
information, contact your project contractor, or an NEC supporting office.

CAUTION:
1. Maintenance personnel must wear a antistatic wrist strap connected to the
grounded (G) jack to prevent the electrostatic discharges that may affect or
damage the Cards, or may cause equipment errors. Wearing the antistatic
wrist strap will minimize the electrostatic that may be built up during the
maintenance operation.

2. Do NOT disconnect/connect the IF Cable while the IDU power is on, or the
equipment may be damaged. Ensure to turn the IDU power off before
attempting to disconnect/connect IF cables.

5.6.1 Replace Fuse

If the power is supplied but the IDU is not powered on, check the condition of fuse(s)
on IDU Refer to the IDU Installation manual.

5.6.2 Replace IDU

Procedure 5-3

 Dismount IDU

1. Disconnect the power supply cables from the power supply terminal on PS-M
Card.

2. Disconnect the I/F cables, signal cables, power cable, etc., in the following
order:
i) Disconnect signal cables from ports on 16E1-A, STM-1A, GbE-A, and MSE
Cards.
ii) Disconnect I/F cables from IN/OUT terminals.
iii) Disconnect the grounding cable from the FG terminal on MODEM-A/EA Card.
NOTE: Reuse the adapters for I/F cable connectors.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-26 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

3. Loosen screws and dismount the IDU.


NOTE: Use a screwdriver to loosen screws.

CAUTION: Surface of IDU may still be hot after the IDU is


powered off.

Figure 5-27 Dismount/Mount IDU

SURFACE (may be hot)

SCREWS

SCREWS

Figure 5-28 Bracket Mounting Position

CENTER POSITION REAR POSITION

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-27

 Mount IDU

4. Place the brackets in the desired positions on IDU, if necessary.

5. Place the IDU onto the original position on the mounting rack, and secure it
by tightening screws.

6. Reconnect the cables to the original ports in the following order:


i) Connect the Grounding cable to the FG port on MODEM-A/EA Card.
NOTE: Screw torque should be within 13 ±2 kgf•cm.
ii) Connect I/F cables (with adapters) to IF IN/OUT ports.

iii) Connect the signal cables to the appropriate ports.


NOTE: Confirm the appropriate port numbers before connecting cables.

7. Form the wiring, and secure the cables to the mounting rack using cable ties.
NOTES:
1. Ensure not to drop the cables down in front of IDU’s indicators and
switches. Front of these must be cleared.
2. Do not bend IF cables. Wire and form the cables with the appropriate
radius, e.g., 5D-FB: 45 mm.

8. Connect the power supply cable to the power supply port on IDU.

9. Check that the IDU is powered on.

IDU (EXAMPLE)
PWR LED

Figure 5-29 Connect Power Supply Cable and Check PWR LED

This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-28 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.7 Trouble Clearing

5.7.1 Overview

Following are procedures to recover the equipment if it is in failure. Failed conditions


are issued to LED on the equipment and to the status information on WebLCT. Refer
to 5.1 Equipment Conditions, 5.2 View Current Status and 5.3 Alarm Lights
for the indications.

5.7.2 Making Contact with NEC

For the technical assistance or information, contact your project contractor, or an


NEC supporting office.

5.7.3 Objects and Their Condition Types

Descriptions and procedures for the trouble clearing are organized in the alphabetic
order of indication messages. Alarm indication messages and their procedures to
clear the conditions are provided as the following:

INDICATION Severity Object Procedure

Adaptive CLK Status —— MSE (Indicating the condition only.)

ALS —— STM-1 (Indicating the condition only.)

APS Lock-in Status —— STM-1 (Indicating the condition only.)

APS Online Status —— STM-1 (Indicating the condition only.)

APS Protection Status —— STM-1 (Indicating the condition only.)

APS SW —— STM-1 (Indicating the condition only.)

ATPC Power Mode —— MODEM/ODU [MODEM] (Indicating the condition only.)

AU AIS MJ STM-1 on Page 5-36

AU LOP MJ STM-1 on Page 5-36

Bus Error MJ IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-37

CLK Card Type Mismatch MJ IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-37

CLK Card Unequipped MJ IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-37

CLK Drift MN IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-38

CLK FAIL MN IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-39

CLK Status Changed MJ IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-29

INDICATION Severity Object Procedure

CLk2M Mount Status —— IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

Cluster Alarm Out —— MODEM/ODU [MODEM] (Indicating the condition only.)

Communication FAIL MJ 16E1 on Page 5-40

MJ ETH

MJ IDU [Main Card]

MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

MJ MSE

MJ STM-1

Compression Setting MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-41


MJ
Mismatch

Delay Equalizer Setting MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-42


MJ
Mismatch

E1 AIS MJ / – 16E1 on Page 5-43

E1 AIS Generated —— 16E1 (Indicating the condition only.)


E1 AIS Generated
—— STM-1 (Indicating the condition only.)

E1 LOS MJ 16E1 on Page 5-43

Early Warning MN MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-44

ETH LF MJ ETH on Page 5-44

ETH LOS MJ ETH on Page 5-45

ETH RF MJ ETH on Page 5-45

ETH TF MJ ETH (Indicating the condition only.)

ETH-OAM LOC MJ IDU on Page 5-46

ETH-OAM Mismerge MN IDU on Page 5-47

ETH-OAM RDI MJ IDU on Page 5-48

ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP MN IDU on Page 5-48

EXT CLK AIS MN IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-49

EXT CLK LOF MJ IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-49

EXT CLK Loop MJ IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-49

EXT CLK LOS MN IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-50

EXT CLK Mount Status —— IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

EXT CLK Output Status —— IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

EXT CLK Quality Level —— IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-30 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

INDICATION Severity Object Procedure

EXT CLK Type Mismatch MJ IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-51

EXT CLK Unequipped MJ IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-51

FAN FAIL MJ FAN [FAN-M] on Page 5-52

FDB Full —— IDU (VLAN) (Indicating the condition only.)

Flow Control —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)

Frame ID MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-52

High BER MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-53

HP PLM MJ STM-1 on Page 5-53

HP RDI MJ STM-1 on Page 5-53

HP TIM MJ STM-1 on Page 5-54

HP UNEQ MJ STM-1 on Page 5-54

IF Cable Short MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-55

InPhase —— MODEM/ODU [MODEM] (Indicating the condition only.)

L2SYNC Loss MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-56

LACP Status —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)

LAG Link MJ IDU (Indicating the condition only.)

LAG LLF Status —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)

LAG Port Loop Detect —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)

LAG Port Status —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)

LAN Link MJ ETH on Page 5-56

License Mismatch MJ IDU on Page 5-58

Link OAM Down IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-58

MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

ETH

LLF —— MODEM/ODU [MODEM] (Indicating the condition only.)

ETH

LLF Message Timeout —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)

LO REF MJ ODU on Page 5-59

LOF MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-59

LOM MJ STM-1 on Page 5-60

Low BER MN MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-60

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-31

INDICATION Severity Object Procedure

LP PLM MJ STM-1 on Page 5-61

LP RDI MJ STM-1 on Page 5-61

LP UNEQ MJ STM-1 on Page 5-62

LTI MJ IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-62

Main Card CPU Alarm MJ IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-63

Maintenance —— IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

MDI/MDI-X —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)

MOD MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-63

MODEM Power Supply —— MODEM/ODU [MODEM] (Indicating the condition only.)

MODEM Power Supply Alarm MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-64

Module MJ 16E1 on Page 5-64

MJ ETH

MJ IDU [Main Card]

MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

MJ MSE

MJ STM-1

MPLS-TP APS Protocol Error MJ ETH on Page 5-65

MPLS-TP OAM LOC MJ ETH on Page 5-65

MPLS-TP OAM Mismerge MJ ETH on Page 5-66

MPLS-TP OAM RDI MJ ETH on Page 5-67

MPLS-TP OAM Unexpected ETH on Page 5-67


MJ
MEP

MS AIS MJ STM-1 on Page 5-68

MS RDI MJ STM-1 on Page 5-68

Mute Status —— ODU (Indicating the condition only.)

ODU Alarm MJ ODU on Page 5-69

ODU CPU / Cable Open MJ ODU on Page 5-69

ODU Power Supply MJ ODU on Page 5-69

ODU Power Supply Set Status —— On-Board ODU on Page 5-69

Online Status —— MODEM/ODU [MODEM] (Indicating the condition only.)

Overheated MJ MODE/ODU [MODEM-AV] on Page 5-70

PJE —— STM-1 (Indicating the condition only.)

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-32 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

INDICATION Severity Object Procedure

Power Supply MJ IDU [PS] on Page 5-71

PPS FAIL MJ IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-71

Radio Traffic Aggregation MODEM/ODU [MODEM] (Indicating the condition only.)


——
Encapsulation Error

Radio Traffic Aggregation Link MJ IDU on Page 5-72

Radio Traffic Aggregation Port MODEM/ODU [MODEM] (Indicating the condition only.)
——
Status

Radio Traffic Aggregation MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-72


MJ
Setting Mismatch

Radio Transmission Mode MODEM/ODU [[MODEM] on Page 5-73


MJ
Mismatch

Radio Transparent Clock MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-74


MJ
Setting Mismatch

RDI MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-75

Remote Critical Event CR ETH on Page 5-75

Remote Dying Gasp CR ETH on Page 5-75

Remote Errored Frame —— ETH on Page 5-76

Remote Errored Frame Period —— ETH on Page 5-76

Remote Errored Frame ETH on Page 5-76


——
Seconds Summary

Remote Errored Symbol ETH on Page 5-76


——
Period

Remote Link Fault MJ ETH on Page 5-76

RS DEG MN STM-1 on Page 5-77

RS EXC MJ STM-1 on Page 5-77

RS LOF MJ STM-1 on Page 5-78

RS TIM MJ STM-1 on Page 5-78

RS UAS Status —— STM-1 (Indicating the condition only.)

Running Status —— IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

RX Bus Error MJ 16E1 on Page 5-79

MJ ETH

MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

MJ MSE

MJ STM-1

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-33

INDICATION Severity Object Procedure

RX Level MJ ODU on Page 5-80

RX Modulation —— MODEM/ODU [MODEM] (Indicating the condition only.)

RX SW Status —— MODEM/ODU [MODEM] (Indicating the condition only.)

SFP Port Type —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)

SFP Removed MJ ETH on Page 5-81

MJ STM-1

SFP Type Mismatch MJ ETH on Page 5-81

MJ STM-1

SNCP Protection Status —— IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

SNCP SW —— IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

Softkey Equip Serial Mismatch MJ IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-82

Speed & Duplex —— ETH (Indicating the condition only.)

Squelch —— IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

SSM FAIL MN IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-83

STM-1 AIS Generated —— STM-1 (Indicating the condition only.)

STM-1 LOS MJ STM-1 on Page 5-83

Switch Complete —— IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

Switch Over FAIL —— IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

Switched Reason —— IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

Switched Time —— IDU [Main Card] (Indicating the condition only.)

TDM Buffer Underrun MJ MSE on Page 5-85

TDM/AMR Range Mismatch MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-85

Temperature MN IDU [Main Card] on Page 5-86

TF MJ STM-1 on Page 5-86

Total FDB Full —— IDU (Indicating the condition only.)

TU AIS MJ STM-1 on Page 5-87

TU LOP MJ STM-1 on Page 5-87

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-34 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

INDICATION Severity Object Procedure

TX Bus Error MJ 16E1 on Page 5-87

MJ ETH

MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

MJ MSE

MJ STM-1

TX Input MJ ODU on Page 5-88

TX Modulation —— MODEM/ODU [MODEM] (Indicating the condition only.)

TX Power MJ ODU on Page 5-88

TX SW Lock-in Status —— MODEM/ODU [MODEM] (Indicating the condition only.)

TX SW Reverse Request —— MODEM/ODU [MODEM] (Indicating the condition only.)

TX SW Status —— ODU (Indicating the condition only.)

Type Mismatch MJ 16E1 on Page 5-89

MJ ETH

MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

MJ MSE

MJ ODU

MJ STM-1

UAE MN MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-90

Unequipped MJ 16E1 on Page 5-90

MJ IDU [FAN-M]

MJ ETH

MJ IDU [Main Card]

MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

MJ MSE

MJ IDU [PS]

MJ STM-1

Unlocked MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-91

Usage Error MN 16E1 on Page 5-91

XIF MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-92

XPIC Mode Mismatch MJ MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-92

XPIC Pair Mute Mode MODEM/ODU [MODEM] on Page 5-93


MJ
Mismatch

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-35

5.7.4 Clearing Procedures

Adaptive CLK Status

STM-1
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the status of the outputs in
the adaptive clock has changed.

ALS

STM-1
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the ALS function has
suspended optical outputs at indicated STM-1 optical port.

APS Lock-in Status

STM-1
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the APS Protection
Switching is in the locked-in status.

APS Online Status

STM-1
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the online status of APS
Protection.

APS Protection Status

STM-1
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the APS Protection status, such
as FS, SF, SD, MS and NR.

APS SW

STM-1
This condition is not an alarm. The message notifies that the selected APS Protection
has been changed.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-36 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

ATPC Power Mode

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that a failure of APTC control
signal (for 90 seconds), or a status of MAX Power (for 90 seconds) has been
detected.

AU AIS

STM-1
This condition indicates that an AU (Administrative Unit) Alarm Indication Signal
has been detected from the incoming signal on the indicated facility. The problem of
this condition pertains to the MSA function of the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-4
1. Check if any alarms occur to a facility or path in the far-end NE that is associated
with the indicated facility.
2. Clear the condition that causes the alarm at the far-end NE.

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the AU AIS alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

AU LOP

STM-1
This condition indicates that a failure of AU (Administrative Unit) LOP (Loss of
Pointer) has been detected from the incoming signal on the indicated facility. The
problem of this condition pertains to MSA function of the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-5
1. Check if any alarms occur to a facility or path in the far-end NE that is associated
with the indicated facility.
2. Clear the condition that causes the alarm at the far-end NE.

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the AU LOP alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-37

Bus Error

IDU [Main Card]


This condition indicates that a failure occurs to the Bus on the indicated Main Card.

Procedure 5-6
1. Replace the MC-AV Card that issues the alarm.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Bus Error alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

CLK Card Type Mismatch

IDU [Main Card]


This condition indicates that the CLK Cards installed on the active MC-MV and on
the standby MC-MV do not match.

Procedure 5-7
1. Using the WebLCT, retrieve the Equipment Inventory Information to check the
Code No. of Main Card 1 (CLK Option) and that of Main Card 2 (CLK
Option).

2. Replace either the CLK Card to allow compatibility with the other.
NOTE: Do not attempt to remove MC-MV Card in the active mode. If the
target MC-MV is in active, switch its mode to the standby to replace.
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the CLK Card Type Mismatch alarm
is cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

CLK Card Unequipped

IDU [Main Card]


This condition indicates that the CLK Card is not installed appropriately.

Procedure 5-8
1. Check if the system is to use the CLK Card.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-38 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

2. Does the system require the CLK Card?


 YES: Check the MC-MV Card. Go to Step 3.
 NO: Using the WebLCT, disable the use of CLK Card, then go to Step 4.

◆ WebLCT Menu Path:


Equipment Setup ➜ Equipment Configuration
[High Accuracy CLK ➜ Not Used]

3. Dismount the MC-MV Card, and check that the CLK Card is appropriately
mounted, then mount the MC-MV Card back in place.
NOTE: Do not attempt to remove MC-MV Card in the active mode. If the
target MC-MV is in active, switch its mode to the standby to replace.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the CLK Card Unequipped alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

CLK Drift

IDU [Main Card]


This condition indicates that the reference clock frequency of the incoming signal of
the indicates facility is out of synchronized range. The problem of this condition
pertains to the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-9
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to the equipment in the other site, and clear it/
them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the CLK Drift alarm is cleared.

3. Is the CLK Drift alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Go to Step 4.
4. Check if any alarm(s) issued to the indicated port/line is/are cleared.

5. Is any alarm reported to the indicated port/line?


 YES: Clear it/them, then go to Step.
 NO: Contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
6. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the CLK Drift alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-39

CLK FAIL

IDU [Main Card]


MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
16E1
STM-1
ETH
This condition indicates that the reference clock source failure is detected from the
incoming signal of the indicated facility. The problem of this condition pertains to the
optical fiber cable or electrical cable of the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-10
1. Check if any other alarm(s) is/are detected from/for the indicated facility or from
the other site.
2. Clear the alarm(s).

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the CLK Fail alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

CLK Status Changed

IDU [Main Card]


This condition is not an alarm.The message indicates that a change has been made to
Reference Clock:

CLK2M Mount Status

IDU [Main Card]


This condition is not an alarm.The message indicates the status of mounted CLK2
Module.

Cluster Alarm Out

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the Cluster Alarm is
enabled to output.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-40 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Communication FAIL

IDU [Main Card]


MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
16E1
STM-1
ETH
MSE

This condition indicates that a failure occurs in the equipment internal


communication among the optional Cards.

Procedure 5-11
1. Launch WebLCT.

2. Execute the H/W Reset to the alarmed object.


◆ WebLCT Menu Path:
Maintenance Control ➜ H/W / F/W Reset Control ➜ H/W Reset Control

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Communication Fail alarm is
cleared.
4. Is Communication FAIL alarm cleared?
 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace the alarmed Card, then go to Step 5.
NOTE: If the alarmed object is the On-Board MODEM, the option here is to
replace the MC-AV (Main Card).
5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Communication Fail alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-41

Compression Setting Mismatch

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that the Header Compression settings or the Payload
Compression at two opposed site do not match, or MODEM with the improper FPGA
version that does not support the Header Compression or the Payload Compression is
set to enable these functions.

Procedure 5-12
1. Launch WebLCT.

1. Check and match the settings of VLAN Mode, Header Compression Mode, and
Payload Compression of alarmed MODEM and its opposed MODEM:
◆ WebLCT Menu Path:
Provisioning ➜ MODEM Function Setting
➜ MODEM Port Setting
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Compression Setting Mismatch
alarm is cleared.
3. Is Compression Setting Mismatch alarm cleared?
 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Go to Step 4.
4. Check the FPGA Version of alarmed MODEM:
 Header Compression mode is available by MODEM-A/EA/AV whose
FPGA Version must be 2.00 or later.
 Payload Compression mode is available by MODEM-EA of NWA-074398-
522 whose FPGA Version must be 8.00 to 8.99.
If the improper FPGA is found, fix it.
5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Compression Setting Mismatch
alarm is cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further
maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-42 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Delay Equalizer Setting Mismatch

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that the indicated MODEM is set to enable the Delay
Equalizer function though its FPGA Version does not support the function.

Procedure 5-13
1. Launch WebLCT.

2. Check the FPGA Version of the indicated MODEM:

◆ WebLCT Menu Path:


Inventory ➜ Equipment Inventory Information — IDU Tab
 Appropriate FPGA Version is 7.02 or later.

3. Is the FPGA Version of the indicated MODEM appropriate?


 YES: Contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
 NO: Replace the MODEM NOTE with the appropriate one, or disable the
Delay Equalizer function.

To disable the function:


◆ WebLCT Menu Path:
Maintenance Control ➜ Office Maintenance Control
(Delay Equalizer option field)

NOTE: If the alarmed object is the On-Board MODEM, the option here is to
replace the MC-AV Card (Main Card).

4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Delay Equalizer Setting
Mismatch alarm is cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the
further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-43

E1 AIS

16E1

This condition indicates that AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) is detected from the
incoming signal on the indicated facility. The problem of this condition pertains to
the indicated line of the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-14
1. Check if any alarm(s) is/are detected in a facility/path of the far-end NE that is
associated with the indicated facility. If any exists, clear it/them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the E1 AIS alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

E1 AIS Generated

16E1
STM-1

This condition is not an alarm. The message informs that the AIS is generated on the
E1 Channel.

E1 LOS

16E1

This condition indicates that E1 LOS (Loss of Signal) is detected from the incoming
signal of the indicated facility. The problem of this condition pertains to the cable
connection of the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-15
1. Check the cable connections or the equipment at the opposing site, and correct
them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the E1 LOS alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-44 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Early Warning

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that the system detects degradation of radio signals. (Early
Warning threshold detection.)

Procedure 5-16
1. Launch the WebLCT.

2. Display the Current Metering to check RX Level.


 If the value is appropriate, replace the IDU.
 If the value is inappropriate, proceed with the flowchart: 5.4.2
Troubleshoot ODU RX Section.

This step ends the procedure.

ETH LF

ETH

This condition indicates that the 10G Ethernet Port on the local NE fails.

Procedure 5-17
1. Check that the Ethernet Cable connected to the target port is appropriately
connected.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH LF alarm is cleared.

3. Is ETH LF alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace the cable, then proceed to the next step.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH LF alarm is cleared.
 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Check the associated port of the opposing site as well, then proceed to
the next step.
5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH LF alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-45

ETH LOS

ETH

This condition indicates that the LOS (Loss of Signal) is detected from the incoming
signal on the indicated Ethernet facility. The problem of this condition pertains to the
optical fiber or to the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-18
1. Verify that the cable connections are all appropriate.

2. Check if any alarm(s) is/are issued to the far-end NE. If any exist(s), clear it/
them.
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH LOS alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

ETH RF

ETH

This condition indicates that the 10G Ethernet Port on the remote NE fails.

Procedure 5-19
1. Check that the Ethernet Cables connected to the target port and its associated port
of both local NE and its opposing NE are appropriately connected.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH RF alarm is cleared.

3. Is ETH LF alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace the cables, then proceed to the next step.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH RF alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-46 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

ETH TF

ETH

This condition indicates that a failure is detected in an installed SFP module. The
problem of this condition is likely to be caused by a defective SFP module.

Procedure 5-20
1. Replace the target SFP module.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH TF alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

ETH-OAM LOC

IDU

This condition indicates that the LOC (Loss of Connectivity) is detected from the
indicated MEP. The problem of this condition pertains to the far-end NE or the MEG/
MEP Configuration Error in the WebLCT.

Procedure 5-21
1. Check if any alarm occurs to the far-end NE that is associated with the indicated
MEP, and clear the condition(s).

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM LOC alarm is cleared.

3. Is the ETH-OAM LOC alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Check the MEG/MEP Configuration in the WebLCT, and go to Step 4.

4. Is the MEG/MEP Configuration appropriate?


 YES: Go to Step 6..
 NO: Correct the configuration, and go to Step 5.

5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM LOC alarm is cleared.
 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Go to Step 6.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-47

6. Check the MEG/MEP Configuration on the far-end site.


7. Is MEG/MEP Configuration on the far-end site appropriate?
 YES: Contact NEC.
 NO: Correct them, and go to Step 8.

8. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM LOC alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

ETH-OAM Mismerge

IDU

This condition indicates that the received ETH-CC Frame matches to the MEP level,
but with an incorrect maintenance ID. This may be caused by receiving the
unexpected ETH-CC Frames from the far-end NE, or by the MEG/MEP
Configuration error in WebLCT.

Procedure 5-22
1. Check the MEG/MEP Configuration, and correct it if it has any error.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM Mismerge alarm is
cleared.
3. Is the ETH-OAM Mismerge alarm cleared?
 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Check the MEG/MEP Configuration of the far-end NE, and then go to
Step 4.
4. Is MEG/MEP Configuration on the far-end site appropriate?
 YES: Contact NEC.
 NO: Correct them, and go to Step 5.
5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM Mismerge alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-48 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

ETH-OAM RDI

IDU

This condition indicates that the RDI (Remote Defect Indication) is detected from the
received ETH-CC Frame on the indicated MEP. The problem of this condition
pertains to alarms (failure) at the peer MEP.

Procedure 5-23
1. Check if any alarm is issued to an MEG of a peer MEP that is associated with the
indicated MEP.
2. Is there any alarm occurring?
 YES: Contact NEC.
 NO: Clear it/them, and go to Step 3.
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM RDI alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP

IDU
This condition indicates that a mismatch of ETH-CC transmit period is detected from
the indicated MEG. The problem is a mismatch between the MEG Configuration of
local NE and that of far-end NE in WebLCT.

Procedure 5-24
1. Check the MEG Configuration, and correct it if it has any error.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP
alarm is cleared.
3. Is the ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP alarm cleared?
 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Check the MEG Configuration of the far-end NE, and go to Step 4.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ETH-OAM Unexpected MEP
alarm is cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further
maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-49

EXT CLK AIS

IDU [Main Card]

This condition indicates that AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) is detected from the
incoming signal on the External Clock IN Port. The problem of this condition
pertains to the external timing source.

Procedure 5-25
1. Check if any alarm is issued to the opposing NE, and clear it/them if exist(s).

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the EXT CLK AIS alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

EXT CLK LOF

IDU [Main Card]

This condition indicates that LOF (Loss of Frame) is detected from the incoming 2
Mbps signal on the External Clock IN port. The problem of this condition pertains to
the external timing source.

Procedure 5-26
1. Check if any alarm is issued to the opposing NE, and clear it/them if exist(s).

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the EXT CLK LOF alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

EXT CLK Loop

IDU [Main Card]

This condition indicates that a timing loop is detected on the EXT CLK. This alarm is
issued if both the EXT CLK IN and EXT CLK OUT selects the NE Clock for the
timing source.
NOTE: If the destination of EXT CLK OUT and source of EXT CLK IN are
different NEs, ignore this alarm.

Procedure 5-27
1. Launch the WebLCT, and display the Ext Clock Setting window.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-50 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

2. Change the reference clock source from EXT CLK IN to other reference clock
source.
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the EXT CLK Loop alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
NOTE: If EXT CLK IN is not used for the system clock, delete it from the
reference clock.
This step ends the procedure.

EXT CLK LOS

IDU [Main Card]


This condition indicates that LOS (Loss of Signal) is detected from the incoming
signal on the indicated facility. The problem of this condition pertains to input cables
or to the external timing source.

Procedure 5-28
1. Check if the cable connections are all appropriate. If not, correct them.

2. Check if any alarm is issued to the far-end NE. If exists, clear it/them.

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the EXT CLK LOS alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

EXT CLK Mount Status

IDU [Main Card]


This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the status of mounted EXT
CLK module.

EXT CLK Output Status

IDU [Main Card]


This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the status EXT CLK outputs.

EXT CLK Quality Level

IDU [Main Card]

This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the quality level of EXT CLK
outputs.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-51

EXT CLK Type Mismatch

IDU [Main Card]

This condition indicates that a failure is detected from the indicated Card. The
problem of this condition is likely to be caused by an invalid Card type.

Procedure 5-29
1. Replace the CLK2M-C Card on the MC-AV Card.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the EXT CLK Type Mismatch alarm is
cleared.
3. Is the EXT CLK Type Mismatch alarm cleared?
 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace MC-AV Card, then go to Step 4.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the EXT CLK Type Mismatch alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

EXT CLK Unequipped

IDU [Main Card]

This condition indicates that a failure is detected from the MC-AV Card. This
condition is caused if the CLK2M-C Card is not properly mounted.

Procedure 5-30
1. Check CLK2M-C Card to see if it is properly mounted. If not, mount it properly.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the EXT CLK Unequipped alarm is
cleared.
3. Is the EXT CLK Unequipped alarm cleared?
 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace MC-AV Card, then go to Step 4.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the EXT CLK Unequipped alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-52 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

FAN Fail

IDU [FAN]

This condition indicates that a failure is detected from the indicated FAN-CV Card.

Procedure 5-31
1. Replace the FAN.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the FAN Fail alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

FDB Full

IDU

This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the FDB of the specified
VLAN is full

Flow Control

IDU [Main Card]


ETH

This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the status of indicates Ethernet
port regarding its flow control.

Frame ID

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that the Frame ID (route differentiation ID) and its expected
value do not match.

Procedure 5-32
1. Check the Frame ID value specified at local and that specified at the opposing
site are identical.
2. If the Frame ID values are correct, replace the IDU.

This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-53

High BER

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
This condition indicates that the radio signals are significantly degraded, where the
threshold is 1E-4 (default).

Procedure 5-33
1. Launch the WebLCT.

2. Display the Current Metering to check RX Level.


 If the value is appropriate, replace the IDU.
 If the value is inappropriate, proceed with the flowchart: 5.4.2
Troubleshoot ODU RX Section.

This step ends the procedure.

HP PLM

STM-1
This condition indicates that PLM (Payload Label Mismatch) is detected from the
incoming signal (Higher Order Path) on the indicated facility. The problem of this
condition pertains to the configuration of far-end NE.

Procedure 5-34
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to a facility or path in the far-end NE that is
associated with the indicated facility.
2. Is any alarm occurring?
 YES: Clear the alarm(s) at the far-end NE.
 NO: Contact NEC.
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the HP PLM alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

HP RDI

STM-1
This condition indicates that RDI (Remote Defect Indication) is detected from the
incoming signal (Higher Order Path) on the indicated facility. The problem of this
condition is caused by an HP alarm at the far-end NE.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-54 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Procedure 5-35
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to a facility or path in the far-end NE that is
associated with the indicated facility.
2. Is any alarm occurring?
 YES: Clear the alarm(s) at the far-end NE.
 NO: Contact NEC.
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the HP RDI alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

HP TIM

STM-1
This condition indicates that TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch) is detected from the
incoming signal (Higher Order Path) on the indicated facility. The problem of this
condition pertains to the J1 setting or to the far-end NE setting.

Procedure 5-36
1. Launch WebLCT to display the STM-1 Port Setting window.
◆ WebLCT Menu Path:
Provisioning ➜ E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting
➜ STM-1 Port Setting
2. Check if the value of Received Higher Order Path Trace and that of Expected
Higher Order Path Trace match.

3. Do they match?
 YES: Contact NEC.
 NO: Correct the value.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the HP TIM alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

HP UNEQ

STM-1
This condition indicates that HP UNEQ (Unequipped) is detected from the incoming
signal (Higher Order Path) on the indicated facility. The problem of this condition
pertains to the crossconnect settings of the far-end NE.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-55

Procedure 5-37
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to the facility or path of the far-end NE that is
associated with the indicated facility.
2. Is any alarm occurring?
 YES: Clear it/them.
 NO: Contact NEC.
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the HP UNEQ alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

IF Cable Short

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that the IF Cable between IDU and ODU is short-circuited.

Procedure 5-38
1. Replace the IF Cable.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the IF Cable Short alarm is cleared.

3. Is the alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace the IDU, and go to 4.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the IF Cable Short alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

Inphase

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the DADE status of the
incoming signals at MODEM-1 and that at MODEM-2 are in phase or not. If they are
in phase, a hitless switching operation is available.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-56 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

L2SYNC Loss

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that the frame synchronization loss is detected from the GFP
Frame on MODEM port.

Procedure 5-39
1. Launch the WebLCT.

2. Display the Current Metering to check RX Level.


 If the value is appropriate, replace the IDU.
 If the value is inappropriate, proceed with the flowchart: 5.4.2
Troubleshoot ODU RX Section.
This step ends the procedure.

LACP Status

IDU [Main Card]


ETH

This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the current status of LACP
(Link Aggregation Control Protocol).

LAG LINK

IDU

This condition indicates that all the member ports of Ethernet LAG (Link
Aggregation Group) have failed. The problem of this condition pertains to the optical
fiber cables or to the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-40
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) in the opposing site, and clear it/them if exist(s).

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LAG LINK alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-57

LAG LLF Status

IDU [Main Card]


ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the settings of Link
Aggregation Group - Link Loss Forwarding.

LAG Port Loop Detect

IDU [Main Card]


ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the received LACP Frame
has its own MAC Source Address for its Source Address.

LAG Port Status

IDU [Main Card]


ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the Active/Standby status of
LAG member ports.

LAN Link

IDU [Main Card]


ETH
This condition indicates that the Link-Down is detected from the indicated Ethernet
port. The problem of this condition pertains to the optical fiber cables or to the far-
end NE.

Procedure 5-41
1. Check the connections of optical fiber cables.
 Connect optical fiber cables properly.
 Replace optical fiber cables if required.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LAN LINK alarm is cleared.

3. Is the alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Go to Step 4.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-58 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

4. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to the far-end NE, and clear it/them if any exist(s).

5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LAN LINK alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

License Mismatch

IDU
This condition indicates that registration(s) of unlicensed setting(s) is/are detected.
This alarm may be issued if the system is downgraded by an inappropriate use of
license, etc., leaving the settings registered under the previous (higher graded)
license. To recover from this status, all the provisioning data should be removed.

Procedure 5-42
1. Launch WebLCT to display the Shipment window.
◆ WebLCT Menu Path:
Equipment Utility ➜ Shipment

2. Remove the provisioning data. Refer to 4.11.6 Restore Factory Default Settings.

3. Is the alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Contact NEC.
This step ends the procedure.

Link OAM Down

IDU [Main Card]


MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
ETH
This condition indicates that the system detects Link OAM Keepalive Protocol
Timeout. The problem of this condition pertains to Ethernet Link, configuration of
Link OAM, hardware error, etc., of the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-43
1. Check if any error occurs to Link OAM Configuration, or to the equipment at the
opposing site, and clear them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Link OAM Down alarm is cleared.
If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-59

LLF

IDU [Main Card]


MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the status of Link Loss
Forwarding.

LLF Message Timeout

ETH
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the conditional signals for
LLF control have repeatedly been received from the opposing radio equipment.

LO REF

ODU
This condition indicates that the Local Reference Signal Loss is detected from ODU.

Procedure 5-44
1. Check the IF Cable (cable type. cable length, and the loss).

2. Is the appropriate IF Cable properly connected?


 YES: Go to Step 5.
 NO: Correct the IF Cable, and go to Step 3..
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LO REF alarm is cleared.

4. Is the alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Go to Step 5.
5. Replace the ODU.

6. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LO REF alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

LOF

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This message indicates that the Loss of Frame is detected at the Radio side.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-60 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Procedure 5-45
1. Launch the WebLCT, and display the Current Metering to check RX Level:
 If the value is appropriate, go to Step 4.
 If the value is inappropriate, proceed with the flowchart: 5.4.2
Troubleshoot ODU RX Section.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LOF alarm is cleared.

3. Is the alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Go to Step 4.
4. Replace the IDU.

5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LOF alarm is cleared. If the alarm
is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

LOM

STM-1

This condition indicates that the Loss of Multiframe is detected from the indicated
STM-1 Port. The problem of this condition pertains to the HPA function at the far-
end NE.

Procedure 5-46
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to the facility or path in the far-end NE, and clear
it/them if any exist(s).
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LOM alarm is cleared. If the alarm
is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

Low BER

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that radio signals are slightly degraded, where the threshold
is 1E-7 (default).

Procedure 5-47
1. Launch the WebLCT.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-61

2. Display the Current Metering to check RX Level.


 If the value is appropriate, replace the IDU.
 If the value is inappropriate, proceed with the flowchart: 5.4.2
Troubleshoot ODU RX Section.

This step ends the procedure.

LP PLM

STM-1

This condition indicates that the Status, PLM (Payload Label Mismatch) is detected
from the incoming signal (Lower Order Path) on the indicated facility. The problem
of this condition pertains to the configuration of far-end NE.

Procedure 5-48
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to a facility or path in the far-end NE that is
associated with the indicated facility.
2. Is any alarm occurring?
 YES: Clear the alarm(s) at the far-end NE.
 NO: Contact NEC.
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LP PLM alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

LP RDI

STM-1

This condition indicates that RDI (Remote Defect Indication) is detected from the
incoming signal (Lower Order Path) on the indicated facility. The problem of this
condition is caused by an LP alarm at the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-49
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to a facility or path in the far-end NE that is
associated with the indicated facility.
2. Is any alarm occurring?
 YES: Clear the alarm(s) at the far-end NE.
 NO: Contact NEC.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-62 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LP RDI alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

LP UNEQ

STM-1

This condition indicates that LP UNEQ (Unequipped) is detected from the incoming
signal (Lower Order Path) on the indicated facility. The problem of this condition
pertains to the crossconnect settings of the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-50
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to the facility or path of the far-end NE that is
associated with the indicated facility.
2. Is any alarm occurring?
 YES: Clear it/them.
 NO: Contact NEC.
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LP UNEQ alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

LTI

IDU [Main Card]

This condition indicates that the system detects LTI (Loss of Timing Inputs) where
the IDU does not synchronize with any reference sources. The problem of this
condition pertains to the optical fiber cables, electrical cables, or to the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-51
1. Check if any alarm regarding the reference clock occur. If any exist(s), clear it/
them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the LTI alarm is cleared. If the alarm is
not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-63

Main Card CPU Alarm

IDU [Main Card]

This condition indicates that the CPU on the indicated MC-AV Card has a failure.

Procedure 5-52
1. Launch WebLCT.

2. Click the Maintenance tool button on the WebLCT.

3. Execute the CPU Reset to the target MC-AV Card. Refer to 4.7 Equipment
Reset for the resetting procedure.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Main Card CPU Alarm is cleared.
If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

Maintenance

IDU [Main Card]

This condition is not an alarm. When the Maintenance indicates On, the system is
set into the Maintenance mode.

MDI/MDI-X

IDU [Main Card]


ETH

This condition is not an alarm. The message shows the operating type (MDI or MDI-
X) of the indicated Ethernet port currently running.

MOD

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that the MODEM fails to output power.

Procedure 5-53
1. Replace the MODEM Card.
NOTE: If the alarmed object is the On-Board MODEM, the option here is to
replace the MC-AV (Main Card).

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-64 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the MOD alarm is cleared. If the alarm
is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

MODEM Power Supply

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
This condition is not an alarm. When the MODEM is powered, the Status indicates
On.

MODEM Power Supply Alarm

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that the MODEM is not powered on.

Procedure 5-54
1. Check if MD/ODU PWR switch is set to on.
2. Is the MD/ODU PWR switch is on?
 YES: Replace the MODEM Card.
NOTE: If the alarmed object is the On-Board MODEM, the option here is to
replace the MC-AV (Main Card).
 NO: Set the switch to on.
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the MODEM Power Supply Alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

Module

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
16E1
STM-1
ETH
MSE

This condition indicates that the system detects the hardware error of the indicated
Card.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-65

Procedure 5-55
1. Launch WebLCT.

2. Execute the H/W Reset to the alarmed object.


◆ WebLCT Menu Path:
Maintenance Control ➜ H/W / F/W Reset Control ➜ H/W Reset Control

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Module alarm is cleared.

4. Is Module alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace the alarmed Card, then go to Step 5.
NOTE: If the alarmed object is the On-Board MODEM, the option here is to
replace the MC-AV (Main Card).
5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Module alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

MPLS-TP APS Protocol Error

ETH
This condition indicates that the system detects the MPLS-TP APS Protocol Error.

Procedure 5-56
1. Check the settings of Architecture Type and Revertive Mode of the Linear
Protection Settings at both the local and far-end sites.
◆ WebLCT Menu Path:
Provisioning ➜ MPLS-TP Function Setting ➜ Linear Protection Setting

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the MPLS-TP APS Protocol Error
alarm is cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further
maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

MPLS-TP OAM LOC

ETH
This condition indicates that the system detects the MPLS-TP OAM Loss of
Continuity.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-66 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Procedure 5-57
1. Check the following:
 Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) in the far-end NE that is associated with the
indicated facility, and clear it/them if any exist(s).
 Check MEG and MEP configurations at local NE, and correct it/them if any is
wrong.
 Check MEG and MEP configurations at far-end NE, and correct it/them if any is
wrong.
2. WebLCT Menu Path:
Provisioning ➜ MPLS-TP Function Setting ➜ MPLS-TP OAM Setting

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the MPLS-TP OAM LOC alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

MPLS-TP OAM Mismerge

ETH

This condition indicates that the system detects the MPLS-TP OAM Mismerge.

Procedure 5-58
1. Check the MEG and MEP configurations at the local site, and correct it/them if
any is wrong..
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the MPLS-TP OAM Mismerge alarm
is cleared.
3. Is the alarm cleared?
 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Check and correct the MEG/MEP configurations at the far-end site.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the MPLS-TP OAM Mismerge alarm
is cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-67

MPLS-TP OAM RDI

ETH

This condition indicates that the system detects the MPLS-TP OAM Remote Defect
Indication.

Procedure 5-59
1. Check if the any alarm(s) occur(s) to the MEG of a peer MEP that is associated
with the indicated facility, and clear it/them if any exist(s).

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the MPLS-TP OAM RDI alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

MPLS-TP OAM Unexpected MEP

ETH

This condition indicates that the system detects the MPLS-TP OAM Unexpected
MEP and Unexpected Period.

Procedure 5-60
1. Check the MEG configuration at the local site, and correct it/them if any is
wrong..
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the MPLS-TP OAM Unexpected MEP
alarm is cleared.
3. Is the alarm cleared?
 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Check and correct the MEG configuration at the far-end site.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the MPLS-TP OAM Unexpected MEP
alarm is cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further
maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-68 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

MS AIS

STM-1

This condition indicates that AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) is detected from the
incoming signal on the indicated facility of Multiplex Section line. This condition is
caused by the MSA function at the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-61
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) in the far-end NE that is associated with the
indicated facility, and clear it/them if any exist(s).
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the MS AIS alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

MS RDI

STM-1

This condition indicates that RDI (Remote Defect Indication). This condition is
caused if a LOS, LOF (consecutive B2 error), or MS-AIS alarm occurs at the far-end
NE.

Procedure 5-62
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) in the far-end NE that is associated with the
indicated facility, and clear it/them if any exist(s).
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the MS RDI alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

Mute Status

MODEM/ODU [ODU]

This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates if the ODU TX Power Output
is set to Mute or not.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-69

ODU Alarm

MODEM/ODU [ODU]
This condition indicates that the hardware error is detected from ODU.

Procedure 5-63
1. Replace ODU
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ODU Alarm is cleared. If the alarm
is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

ODU CPU / Cable Open

MODEM/ODU [ODU]
This condition indicates that the CPU on ODU has a failure, or IF Cable between
IDU and ODU is not properly connected.

Procedure 5-64
Refer to 5.4.1 Troubleshoot ODU TX Section and/or 5.4.2 Troubleshoot ODU
RX Section for the procedure(s).

ODU Power Supply

MODEM/ODU [ODU]
This condition indicates that the power supply to ODU fails.

Procedure 5-65
1. Replace the ODU.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the ODU Power Supply is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

ODU Power Supply Set Status

MODEM/ODU [On-Board MODEM]


This condition is not an alarm. When the power is supplied to ODU via ODU PWR
IF1 or ODU PWR IF2, its indication is ON; or if not supplied, the indication is OFF.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-70 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Online Status

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates which MODEM is on line
when the MODEMs configure the 1+1 Protection.

Overheated

MODEM/ODU [MODEM-AV]

This condition indicates that the MODEM-AV Card fails due to the rise in
temperature, exceeding the threshold level.

Procedure 5-66
1. Check the following alarm(s), and if any exist, clear the failed condition:
 FAN Unequipped
 FAN FAIL
 FAN Type Mismatch

2. When the condition(s) above is/are cleared, do one of the following:


 Execute the H/W Reset Control using the WebLCT.
 Replace the target MODEM-AV Card

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Overheated is cleared.


NOTE: Wait at least for an hour in the adjusted air before checking the
Current Status.

If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

PJE

STM-1

This condition is not an alarm. The message informs that the PJE (Pointer
Justification Event) has been generated at the STM Port.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-71

Power Supply

IDU [PS]

This condition indicates that the power supply is down. The problem of this condition
is caused by failure of the power source, or by the removal of power cable.

Procedure 5-67
1. Check if the power cable is properly connected, and/or if the power source runs
properly, and adjust them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Power Supply alarm is cleared.

3. Is the alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Check the power cable and fuse if they are appropriate. If either is
inappropriate, replace is/them, then go to Step 4.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Power Supply alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

PPS Fail

IDU [Main Card]

This condition indicates that E1 SNCP PPS (Path Protection Switch) failure is
detected from the incoming signal on the indicated facility. The problem of this
condition pertains to the receiving signals on both the paths configuring the PPS.

Procedure 5-68
1. Check if the secondary path and crossconnection settings are appropriate. If not,
correct it/them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the PPS Fail alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-72 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Radio Traffic Aggregation Encapsulation Error

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition is not an alarm. However, if Occur is indicated, the message informs
that the encapsulation packet error has been occurred.

Radio Traffic Aggregation Link

IDU (Radio Link Aggregation Group)

This condition indicates that all the member ports of Radio Link Aggregation Group
have failed.

Procedure 5-69
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to ODU and MODEM Card. If any exist(s),
correct it/them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Radio Traffic Aggregation Link is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

Radio Traffic Aggregation Port Status

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition is not an alarm. The Status indicates the current role of the port.

Radio Traffic Aggregation Setting Mismatch

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that RTA (Radio Traffic Aggregation) settings at the local
and that at its opposing site do not match, or the firmware version, license, and/or the
FPGA version of MODEM is/are not compliant with the RTA function.

Procedure 5-70
1. At both the local and remote side, check the firmware version, license, and
MODEM’s FPGA version of the Radio Group that is issuing the alarm, and
correct it/them if any is/are wrong.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-73

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Radio Traffic Aggregation
Setting Mismatch is cleared.

 YES: This step ends the procedure.


 NO: Check and correct the RTA Settings at both local and remote side.
3. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.

This step ends the procedure.

Radio Transmission Mode Mismatch

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that Radio Transmission Mode at the local and that at its
opposing sites do not match, or the indicated MODEM that does not support the
Radio Transmission Mode function is set to enable the function.

Procedure 5-71
1. Launch WebLCT.

2. Check and match the settings of Radio Transmission Mode of the alarmed
MODEM and its opposed MODEM:
◆ WebLCT Menu Path:
Provisioning ➜ MODEM Function Setting
➜ MODEM Port Setting

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Transmission Mode Mismatch
alarm is cleared.

4. Is Radio Transmission Mode Mismatch alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Go to Step 5.

5. Check the alarmed MODEM Version. Appropriate MODEM that supports the
Radio Transmission Mode are:
 MODEM-EA: NWA-074398-322/422/522
FPGA Version: 6.00 or later
MODEM Parameter: 8 or later

 MODEM-AV: (any version is available)

If the wrong type MODEM is installed, disable the Radio Transmission Mode or
replace it with the appropriate type of MODEM.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-74 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

6. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Radio Transmission Mode
Mismatch alarm is cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the
further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

Radio Transparent Clock Setting Mismatch

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that Radio Transparent Setting at the local and that at its
opposing sites do not match, or the indicated MODEM that does not support the
Radio Transparent Clock function is set to enable the function.

Procedure 5-72
1. Launch WebLCT.

2. Check and match the settings of Radio Transparent Clock Setting of the alarmed
MODEM and its opposed MODEM:

◆ WebLCT Menu Path:


Provisioning ➜ MODEM Function Setting
➜ MODEM Port Setting
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Radio Transparent Clock Setting
alarm is cleared.
4. Is Radio Transparent Clock Setting alarm cleared?
 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Go to Step 5.
5. Check the alarmed MODEM Version. Appropriate MODEM that supports the
Radio Transparent Clock are:
 MODEM-EA: NWA-074398-322/422/522
FPGA Version: 7.00 or later
MODEM Parameter: 13 or later

 MODEM-AV: (any version is available)


If the wrong type MODEM is installed, disable the Radio Transparent Clock or
replace it with the appropriate type of MODE-EA.
6. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Radio Transparent Clock Setting
alarm is cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further
maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-75

RDI

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that RDI (Remote Defect Indication) signal is detected at the
port on MODEM-A/EA Card.

Procedure 5-73
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) in the far-end NE. If any exist(s), correct it/them.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the RDI alarm is cleared. If the alarm is
not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

Remote Critical Event

ETH [MC-AV Card, GbE-A Card]


This condition indicates that the hardware error is detected at the opposing site
equipment, which is reported via the Ethernet link. This is an alarm regarding
IEEE802.3ah, Link OAM.

Procedure 5-74
1. Replace the equipment at the opposing site.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Remote Critical Event alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

Remote Dying Gasp

ETH
This condition indicates that the equipment on the opposing site is in the reboot
process. This is an alarm regarding the IEEE802.3ah, Link OAM.

Procedure 5-75
1. Check if any failures occur to the equipment on the opposing site, and if any
exist, clear them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Remote Dying Gasp alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-76 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Remote Errored Frame

ETH [MC-AV Card, GbE-A Card]


This condition is not an alarm. The system detects that an Errored Frame message is
issued at the opposing site.

Remote Errored Frame Period

ETH [MC-AV Card, GbE-A Card]


This condition is not an alarm. The system detects that an Errored Frame Period
message is issued at the opposing site.

Remote Errored Frame Seconds Summary

ETH [MC-AV Card, GbE-A Card]


This condition is not an alarm. The system detects that an Errored Frame Seconds
Summary message is issued at the opposing site.

Remote Errored Frame Symbol Period

ETH [MC-AV Card, GbE-A Card]


This condition is not an alarm. The system detects that an Errored Symbol Period
message is issued at the opposing site.

Remote Link Fault

ETH [MC-AV Card, GbE-A Card]


This condition indicates that Ethernet link failure at the opposing site is detected via
the incoming port. This is an alarm regarding IEEE802.3ah, Link OAM.

Procedure 5-76
1. Check if any alarms occur to the equipment or cable connections at n the
opposing site, and if any exist, clear them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Remote Link Fault alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-77

RS DEG

STM-1

This condition indicates that the system detects B1 Byte error in Regenerator Section
(RS Degraded) on the STM-1 Port.

Procedure 5-77
1. Check the following:
 If any alarm(s) occur(s) to the far-end NE that is associated with the
indicated facility, clear it/them.
 Dust and dirt may be considered to cause the error. Clean the optical
connectors of the indicated facility. (Verify that the connection(s) are
properly and securely made again after the cleaning.)
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the RS DEG alarm is cleared.

3. Is the alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace the SFP.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the RS DEG alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

RS EXC

STM-1

This condition indicates that B1 Byte error occurs to the Regenerator Section on the
STM-1 Port

Procedure 5-78
1. Check the following:
 If any alarm(s) occur(s) to the far-end NE that is associated with the
indicated facility, clear it/them.
 Dust and dirt may be considered to cause the error. Clean the optical
connectors of the indicated facility. (Verify that the connection(s) are
properly and securely made again after the cleaning.)

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-78 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the RS EXC alarm is cleared.

3. Is the alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace the SFP.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the RS EXC alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

RS LOF

STM-1

This condition indicates that Loss of SDH Frame synchronization is detected from
the Regenerator Section on the STM-1 Port. The problem of this condition pertains to
an optical fiber cable or to the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-79
1. Check the optical fiber cable and the connector of the upstream equipment. If any
inappropriate condition(s) is/are found, correct it/them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the RS LOF alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

RS TIM

STM-1
This condition indicates that TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch) is detected from the
Regenerator Section on the STM-1 Port. The problem of this condition pertains to the
J0 setting, or to the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-80
1. Launch WebLCT to display the STM-1 Port Setting window.

◆ WebLCT Menu Path:


Provisioning ➜ E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting ➜ STM-1 Port Setting

2. Check if the value of Received Section Trace and that of Expected Section
Trace match.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-79

3. Do they match?
 YES: Contact NEC.
 NO: Correct the value.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the RS TIM alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

RS UAS Status

STM-1

This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that UAS (Unavailable
Seconds) status of Regenerator Section at STM-1 Port.

Running Status

IDU [Main Card]

This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the current running status of
the redundant Main Cards.

RX Bus Error

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
16E1
STM-1
ETH
MSE

This condition indicates that Bus Error (equipment internal failure) is detected at the
receiving port. A hardware failure is likely to cause this condition.

Procedure 5-81
1. Launch WebLCT.

2. Execute the H/W Reset to the alarmed object.


◆ WebLCT Menu Path:
Maintenance Control ➜ H/W / F/W Reset Control ➜ H/W Reset Control

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the RX Bus Error alarm is cleared.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-80 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

4. Is RX Bus Error alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace the alarmed Card, then go to Step 5.
NOTE: If the alarmed object is the On-Board MODEM, the option here is to
replace the MC-AV (Main Card).
5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the RX Bus Error alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

RX Level

ODU
This condition indicates that the receiving level is lower than the threshold level
(between –72 to –94 dBm according to the modulation system and bit rates).

Procedure 5-82
Refer to 5.4.2 Troubleshoot ODU RX Section for the procedure.

RX Modulation

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
This condition is not an alarm. The message informs that the modulation system at
the receiving side has been changed.

RX SW Status

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the state of Radio interface RX
SW usage in the redundant configuration.

SFP Port Type

ETH

This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates if the SFP Port is optical or
electrical.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-81

SFP Removed

STM-1
ETH

This condition indicates that the system cannot detect the SFP Module on the
indicated port. This condition is caused if the SFP is not properly plugged in, is not
mounted, or is defective.

Procedure 5-83
1. Check if the SFP on the indicated port is properly and securely plugged in.
 If the indicated port is vacant, mount an SFP Module onto the appropriate
port.
 If an SPF module is mounted on the indicated port, dismount and remount it
to ensure that the module is fully mounted.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the SFP Removed alarm is cleared.

3. Is the alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace the SFP module.

4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the SFP Removed alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

SFP Type Mismatch

STM-1
ETH

This condition indicates that the provided SFP Port type and the mounted SFP
Module do not match.

Procedure 5-84

 For Ethernet Port or STM-1 Port, go to Step 1.


 For other ports, go to Step 4.

1. Launch WebLCT, and display the Inventory window to check the port
configuration. Correct the setting(s) if any inappropriate setting is found.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-82 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the SFP Type Mismatch alarm is
cleared.
3. Is the SFP Type Mismatch alarm cleared?
 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Go to Step 4.
4. Check if the mounted SFP Module is the correct type for the port.

5. Is the type of SFP Module appropriate?


 YES: Contact NEC.
 NO: Replace SFP Module, and go to Step 6.
6. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the SFP Type Mismatch alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

SNCP Protection Status

IDU [Main Card]


This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the Path Protection Switching
status.

SNCP SW

IDU [Main Card]


This condition is not an alarm. The message informs that the Path Protection
Switching was carried out.

Softkey Equip Serial Mismatch

IDU [Main Card]

If Alarm is indicated for the Status, the serial number of Software License Key
installed in the MC-AV Card and that of equipment do no match.

Procedure 5-85
If this condition occurs, contact NEC to obtain the correct Softkey, and download it.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-83

Speed & Duplex

ETH [MC-AV Card, GbE-A Card]

This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the current status of speed
and duplex mode of the indicated port.

Squelch

IDU [Main Card]

This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the External Clock Output
is in the squelch condition.

SSM Fail

IDU [Main Card]

This condition indicates that the received Sync Status Message is in the unstable
condition. The problem of this condition pertains to the input cable or to the external
timing source.

STM-1 AIS Generated

STM-1

This condition is not an alarm. The message informs that the Alarm Indication Signal
is generated on the indicated STM-1 optical port.

STM-1 LOS

STM-1

This condition indicates that LOS (Loss of Signal) is detected from the incoming
signal on the STM-1 optical port. The problem of this condition pertains to the
optical fiber cable, or to the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-86
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to the far-end NE that is associated with the
indicated facility, and correct it/them if any exist(s).

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-84 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the STM-1 LOS alarm is cleared.

3. Is the alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Check if the optical fiber cable is properly and securely connected, then
go to Step 4.
4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the STM-1 LOS alarm is cleared.

5. Is the alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace the optical fiber cable, then go to Step 6.
6. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the STM-1 LOS alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

Switch Complete

IDU [Main Card]


This condition is not an alarm. The message informs that the switching process is
completed.

Switch Over FAIL

IDU [Main Card]


This condition is not an alarm. The message informs that the switching operation
failed.

Switched Reason

IDU [Main Card]


This condition is not an alarm. The message informs the factor that made to switch
the MC-AV Cards.

Switched Time

IDU [Main Card]


This condition is not an alarm. The message informs the date and time when the
switching operation for MC-AV Cards was carried out.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-85

TDM Buffer Underrun

MSE
This condition indicates that a packet to TDM Jitter Buffer Underrun is detected from
the pseudo-wire connection. The problem of this condition pertains to the cable
connection, far-end NE, or to the packet jitter in the network.

Procedure 5-87
1. Check if the cable connections are appropriate, and if any alarm(s) occur(s) to the
far-end NE. If anything inappropriate is/are found, correct it/them.
 Increasing the jitter buffer size may solve the issue if the condition is cause
by the packet jitter in the network.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the TDM Buffer Underrun alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

TDM/AMR Range Mismatch

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
This condition indicates the following:
 Number of TDM (E1/STM-1) Channel Mappings specified at the local site and
that at the opposing site do not match.
 Selected AMR Modulation types at the local site and that at the opposing site do
not match.

Procedure 5-88
1. Launch the WebLCT, and check the AMR / Radio Mapping Configuration:

◆ WebLCT Menu Path:


Equipment Setup ➜ AMR / Radio Mapping Configuration

2. Verify the following:


 Check if the specified number of TDM (E1/STM-1) Channels at both the
local site and the opposing site are all the same.
 Check if the usage of AMR Ranges at both the local site and the opposing
site are all the same.
If the settings do not match, correct them. For the WebLCT procedure, refer to
4.5 AMR/Radio Mapping Configuration in the Set Network and System
Provisioning manual.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-86 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Usage Error alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

Temperature

IDU [Main Card]

This condition indicates that the temperature within IDU exceeds the operational
limitation.

Procedure 5-89
1. Check the room temperature, and adjust it.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Temperature alarm is cleared.
NOTE: Wait at least for an hour in the adjusted air before checking the
Current Status.
If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

TF

STM-1

This condition indicates that the indicated SFP Module has failure.

Procedure 5-90
1. Replace the SFP.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the TF alarm is cleared. If the alarm is
not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

Total FDB Full

IDU

This condition is not an alarm. The message informs that the Dynamic Entry in L2
Switch has reached the maximum number.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-87

TU AIS

STM-1

This condition indicates that AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) is detected from the
incoming TU (Tributary Unit) signal on the indicated facility. The problem of this
condition pertains to the LPA function of the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-91
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to the far-end NE that is associated with the
indicated facility, and correct it/them if any exist(s).
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the TU AIS alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

TU LOP

STM-1

This condition indicates that LOP (Loss of Pointer) is detected from the incoming TU
(Tributary Unit) signal on the indicated facility. The problem of this condition
pertains to the HPA function of the far-end NE.

Procedure 5-92
1. Check if any alarm(s) occur(s) to the far-end NE that is associated with the
indicated facility, and correct it/them if any exist(s).
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the TU LOP alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

TX Bus Error

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
16E1
STM-1
ETH
MSE

This condition indicates that the data communication Bus failure is detected from a
signal at the outgoing direction. This condition is caused by the hardware failure on
the Card.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-88 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Procedure 5-93
1. Launch WebLCT.

2. Execute the H/W Reset to the alarmed object.


◆ WebLCT Menu Path:
Maintenance Control ➜ H/W / F/W Reset Control ➜ H/W Reset Control

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the TX Bus Error alarm is cleared.

4. Is TX Bus Error alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace the alarmed Card, then go to Step 5.
NOTE: If the alarmed object is the On-Board MODEM, the option here is to
replace the MC-AV (Main Card).
5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the TX Bus Error alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

TX Input

ODU
This condition indicates that TX IF signal level is out of the range (–29 dBm ±5 dB).

Procedure 5-94
Refer to 5.4.1 Troubleshoot ODU TX Section for the procedure(s).

TX Modulation

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
This condition is not an alarm. The message informs that the modulation system of
MODEM Card at the transmitting side has been changed.

TX Power

ODU

This condition indicates that the transmitting power level of ODU is lower than 3 dB.

Procedure 5-95
Refer to 5.4.1 Troubleshoot ODU TX Section for the procedure(s).

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-89

TX SW Lock-in Status

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates that the TX Switching
operation is in the locked-in status.

TX SW Reverse Request

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
This condition is not an alarm. The message indicates the receiving condition of the
TX SW Signal at the opposing site.

TX SW Status

ODU
This condition is not an alarm.The message indicates the state of Radio Interface TX
SW usage in the 1+1 HS Redundant Configuration.

Type Mismatch

ODU
MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
16E1
STM-1
ETH
MSE
This condition indicates that the indicated object is not supported by iPASOLINK
VR 4 system, or is not operational by the provisioned modulation settings.

Procedure 5-96
1. Launch the WebLCT, and display the Inventory window to check the
configuration. If any setting is found inappropriate, correct it/them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Type Mismatch alarm is cleared.

3. Is the alarm cleared?


 YES: This step ends the procedure.
 NO: Replace the indicated object, then go to Step 4.
NOTE: If the alarmed object is the On-Board MODEM, the option here is to
replace the MC-AV (Main Card).

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-90 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

4. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Type Mismatch alarm is cleared.
If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

UAE

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
This condition indicates that the Unavailable Second Event is detected.

Procedure 5-97
1. Check the Current Alarms, and if any other alarms occur(s), clear it/them.

2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the UAE alarm is cleared. If the alarm
is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

Unequipped

IDU [Main Card, PS, FAN]


MODEM/ODU [MODEM]
16E1
STM-1
ETH
MSE
This condition indicates that the registered slot is vacant. This condition is caused by
an inappropriate installation as well.

Procedure 5-98
1. Check the slot of the indicated Card/

2. Is the Card mounted in the indicated slot?

 YES: Check if it is the appropriate Card for the slot, and/or if it is properly
mounted. If not, correct the mounting condition.
 NO: Mount the appropriate Card to the slot.

3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Unequipped alarm is cleared.

4. Is the alarm cleared?

 YES: This step ends the procedure.


 NO: Replace the Card, and go to Step 5.
NOTE: If the alarmed object is the On-Board MODEM, the option here is to
replace the MC-AV (Main Card).

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-91

5. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Unequipped alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

Unlocked

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that the status of Wireless Synchronization at the local side is
unstable (clock is not locked).

Procedure 5-99
1. Check the equipment clock setting at both local and remote site, and adjust it/
them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Unlocked alarm is cleared. If the
alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

Usage Error

16E1

This condition indicates that the E1 Port that is registered as Not Used receives the
signals. This condition is caused by the inappropriate cable installation as well.

Procedure 5-100
1. Check the indicated E1 Port if it has a cable connection.

2. Launch the WebLCT, and check the usage of target E1 Port:

◆ WebLCT Menu Path:


Provisioning ➜ E1/STM-1/Cross Connect Setting ➜ E1 Port Setting
 Verify the usage of E1 Ports.
 According to the E1 Ports usage, set the indicated E1 Port to Used, or
remove the cable from the indicated port to connect it to the appropriate port.
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the Usage Error alarm is cleared. If
the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-92 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

XIF

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that a failure is detected if:


 XIF Cable connection between the Master XPIC and Slave MODEM-A/EA
Cards is inappropriate.
 Backboard Pin connections between MODEM-AV and IDU is inappropriate,
which disables the communications between MODEM-AV Cards.

Procedure 5-101
1. Check the following:
 For MODEM-A/EA, check if the XIF Cable is properly connected. If not,
connect it properly.
 For MODEM-AV, replace the target MODEM-AV Card.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the XIF alarm is cleared. If the alarm is
not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance support.
This step ends the procedure.

XPIC Mode Mismatch

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that the XPIC Configuration is not properly enabled by two
MODEM-A/EA Cards. The condition may be caused by inappropriate assignment of
Master and Slave.

Procedure 5-102
1. Check if the assignments of Master/Slave for XPIC Configuration at the
opposing site are appropriate. If not, correct them.
2. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the XPIC Mode Mismatch alarm is
cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-93

XPIC Pair Mute Mode Mismatch

MODEM/ODU [MODEM]

This condition indicates that the settings of XPIC Pair Mute Mode at the local site
and that at its opposing sites do not match.

Procedure 5-103
1. Launch WebLCT.

2. Check and match the settings of XPIC Pair Mode of the alarmed MODEM and its
opposed MODEM:

◆ WebLCT Menu Path:


Provisioning ➜ MODEM Function Setting
➜ XPIC Setting
3. Retrieve the Current Status, and check if the XPIC Pair Mute Mismatch alarm
is cleared. If the alarm is not cleared, contact NEC for the further maintenance
support.
This step ends the procedure.

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-94 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.8 Alarm Action Table

5.8.1 STM-1 Interface [Through Mode]

STM-1 INTERFACE [THROUGH MODE]

PHYSICAL REGENERATOR SECTION REGENERATOR SECTION EQUIPMENT


SECTION (INCOMING) (OUTGOING) PATH

Equipment
Fail

TF AIS
(SW-bit)

LOF

AIS_GEN
AIS

OPT
SHUTDOWN (AIS)

LOS

LOF AIS
(all-ONEs)

AIS
(SW bit)

RS-EXC SF
(SW-bit)

RS-DEG SD
(SW-bit)

(Detection); (AIS Insertion); (Effective if assigned)

GGS-000394-07E IPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-95

5.8.2 STM-1 Interface [Channelized Mode]

STM-1 INTERFACE [CHANNELIZED MODE]

PHYSICAL RS MS AU HOP TU LOP E1 EQUIPMENT


SECTION PATH
TF AIS_GEN
Equipment
Fail

Shutdown
AIS
AIS_GEN (SW-bit)

SF
(SW-bit)
LOS AIS_GEN
LOF
AIS
RS-TMI (all-ONEs)

MS-AIS

RS-EXC SF (SW bit)

RS-DEG SD
AIS (SW-bit)
MS-RDI (all-ONEs)

AU-AIS
MS-RDI
AIS
AU-LOP (all-ONEs)

HP-UNEQ

HP-TIM

HP-RDI

HP-LOM

HP-PLM AIS
(all-ONEs)
HP-RDI

TU-AIS AIS
(all-ONEs)
TU-LOP

LP-UNEQ

LP-RDI

LP-PLM AIS
(SW-bit)
LP-RDI
AIS
RS (Regenerator Section); MS (Multiplex Section); AU (Administrative Unit); HOP (Higher Order Path); TU (Tributary Unit);
LOP (Lower Order Path); (Detection); (AIS Insertion); (Effective if assigned)

iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GGS-000394-07E


Submission Prohibited
NEC Group Internal Use Only
5-96/END CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.8.3 E1 Interface

E1 INTERFACE

E1 EQUIPMENT PATH

Equipment Fail

AIS (SW-bit)

AIS_GEN SF (SW-bit)

LOF

AIS (SW-bit)

AIS_GEN

GGS-000394-07E iPASOLINK VR 4: OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

You might also like